Home

2014 Dodge Charger SRT Owner`s Manual

Contents

1. Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 19 50 Amp Red Power Steering 2 20 30 Amp Pink Wiper Motor 21 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Washers 22 Fuse Spare 23 Fuse Spare 24 Fuse Spare 28 25 Amp Natural Fuel Pump 29 15 Amp Blue Transmission Shifter 30 Fuse Spare 31 25 Amp Natural Engine Module 32 Fuse Spare 33 E Fuse Spare 34 25 Amp Natural Powertrain 1 35 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain 2 36 10 Amp Red Anti Lock Brake Module 548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 37 10 Amp Red Engine Controller Rad Fan Relays 38 10 Amp Red Airbag Module 39 10 Amp Red Power Steering Module AC Clutch Relay 48 10 Amp Red AWD Module Front Axle Disconnect 49 Fuse Spare 50 Fuse Spare 51 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump 52 Fuse Spare 53 Fuse Spare MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549 Rear Power Distribution Center Fuses CAUTION There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center contains fuses and relays When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system f
2. 589 Treadweati aem hier uce3 veo v S SEES 589 Temperature Grades lessen 590 E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 583 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehic
3. 04 110 Automatic Door Locks 0 llle 33 Automatic Headlights sss set esr eanes siima 216 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 333 ee INDEX 593 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 386 Automatic Transmission sess 403 Adding Fluid 5 s eosr re 537 Fluid and Filter Changes 537 Eluid Change eater ised ete BES baths a 537 Fluid Level Check 00 0 000005 535 Fluid Type 22 224 e Re RR as 562 Special Additives 00 0000 536 Auto Unlock Doors llle 33 Auto Up Power Windows llle 42 Axle El ld estu see ERE tt eds 562 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 562 Battery o 82a uta ead adi S esca oe eii 516 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Location s ues exer RU E RR 516 Belts SCA Sees ac onan a E A rae cut ee ee 50 Bluetooth Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing 156 Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect amp Phone And Mobile Phone 143 Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile PRONG seca nde ood dk oe ae OE Eee ae aa 130 Body Mechanism Lubrication 522 B Pillar Locations iss vein RR d 442 Brake Assist System s orema a enp e eee eee 427 Brake Control System Electronic 426 Brake Fluid so 0 0 0 cc ee es 562 Brake Parking eset ae e y e ee bo 422 Brake System o cera eee 533 Anti Lock ABS
4. Gear Shift Indicator GSI If Equipped 331 Oil Change Due Fuel Economy 2 6 6 cee nee Vehicle Speed os oy dain e EN Pen 335 Trip InfO i e mm ma 335 ONS 3 53 46 reb op E a E o E 336 ORD n ua deu Seq euh Seu addu 336 Gl Messages Lesen bb ad edt hae ad 340 Turn Menu OFF iuis Rey 340 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M B Uconnect SETTINGS 23 exces 340 Radio Operant 32 4445 ax ex CR xen 376 Hard Keys iss seo Rem erem es 340 CD Player cere edem eem eme os 376 So Keys toas Suny dead ove edes E ar 340 Mi CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 377 Customer Programmable Features ll RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 377 Uconnect 43 Settings less 340 E CLIMATE CONTROLS sus 378 usur ce id MM 355 General Overview 0 00000 378 SRT Performance Features 370 FREED on SO quaii Sectio ete s Wl iPod USB MP3 CONTROL 373 PEDE toh a Wipes Gaia Pitt dd E HARMAN KARDONG Logic7 HIGH Climate Control Functions 384 PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND Automatic Temperature Control ATC 386 SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE o n Operating Tips isses lll STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS I EQUIPPED iei RRRymeeh ea ee ae a 375 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040141447
5. You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK e The highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC whenever the Electronic Range Select ERS feature is active Use the selector on the shift lever to activate ERS Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting And Operat ing for further information 7 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped i Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency a
6. Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system actly when installing an infant or child restraint buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of Child restraint anchorages are designed to with the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with Stand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted the child restraint installation instead of buckling it child restraints Under no circumstances are they to behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle the seatbelt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Lap Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Belt Restraints In This Vehicle The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Lockin
7. Use on rear wheels only on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if dif ferent from the speed recommended by the manu facturer NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instruc tions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Continued 460 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug gest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed Ti
8. of C E cx _ i i2014 f HARGERHR OWNER S MANUAL So RT VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of acci dents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your per ceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or im provements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufac tured Copyright 2013 Chrysler Group LLC e
9. 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information e Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go press the Keyless Enter N Go START STOP
10. 3 Press and release the SET S button on the memory switch 4 Within five seconds press and release the MEMORY button 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information A 031036877 Center EVIC if equipped will display which quipp play Memory Seat Switches memory position has been set es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 NOTE e Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter NOTE Before programming your RKE transmitters you must select the Memory To FOB feature through the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Program mable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation To program your RKE transmitters perform the follow ing 1 Remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go 2 Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 The system will recall any stored settings f
11. Radio will play Radio will play Radio will play the Radio will play Radio will play the 0475016865 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 NOTE 1 You can replace the album artist song genre playlist podcast and audio book names with any correspond ing names on the current device that is playing 2 You can replace 8 with any track on the CD that is currently playing Command is only available when CD is playing 3 Playlist Podcast and audio book commands are only available when the iPod is connected and playing 4 VR commands Albums Artists and Genre names are based on the music metadata contained on the loaded connected device NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Uconnect Voice Command Travel Link commands These commands can be said on any screen when a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect voice command button SVR on the steering wheel Screen will Screen will Screen will Screen will change to change to change to change to Travel Link change to change to change to Travel Link Travel Link Travel Link Movie Travel Link Travel Link NFL Home Fuel Prices Weather Listings Sports Favorites Headlines Screen will Screen will Screen will 0475016864 Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 NOTE 1 You can replace NFL with any league shown on the sports
12. 9 Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have been pre loaded in the phonebook Commands such as Call Emergency and Call Towing Assistance will call the corresponding number stored with those contacts NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE O Tonm j Uconnect Te Messaging Thea commana cun be spotan om ey nosan atr paning Pe Uccremce Pane sm tamin Ap e te meng erm dusese vonet phase nana Vp hro mening whet Note Avaliable Voice Commands are shown n bold face and are underined in the shaded boxes 0475016870 NOTE 1 You can replace John Smith with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to for John Smith You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls or Missed Calls Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth O1 D UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone You can replace 4 with any message number shown y 8 on the screen If y
13. e Passive Entry Keyless Enter N Go Touch the Passive Entry soft key to change this display This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 Passive Entry soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle Heated Seats e Auto Heated Seats If Equipped Touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key to change this display When the temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C the Driver s heated seat will turn on To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the back arrow soft key Engine Off Options e Easy Exit Seats If Equipped Touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key to change this display This feature provides automatic driver seat po sitioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Headlight Off Delay Touch the Headlight Off Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the driver ca
14. ssec RR nine rap 424 Fluid Cheek 552m eR bL x 533 Master Cylinder ii css e em x Rs 533 Parking ie seed Baad le eio d Warning Light 504 INDEX EN Brake Transmission Interlock LL 403 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 97 Brightness Interior Lights 224 Bulb Replacement llle es 555 Bulbs Light eer RR riet eR mes 102 Camera Reate 2224554222153 44 5 046 Panett ges 276 Capacities Fluid 0 0 eee eee 560 Caps Filler Oil Engine serp eee ee hea RI mas 515 Power Steering secsi uinen eiia n 421 Radiator Coolant Pressure 530 Carbon Monoxide Warning llli 98 Cargo Vehicle Loading lille 478 Car Washes 2 dh tsb peak xk Ada Es 539 Cellular Phone s urea Race ede 377 Certification Label 00 0000 478 Chains Diese eoe ede eqni ae Sin ba ac 458 Chart Tire Sizing Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 316 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 98 Checks Safety oreet 3 his ek ERR nee Es 98 Child Restrainit ssu nares eed RR ee Ra 75 Child Safety Locks ze ee Ege E ERE CREER 34 Clean Air Gasoline s pre dorai diea eda E aa E E 470 Cleaning Wheels sies RR EU RP aits seed 540 Climate Control 0 0 0 0 0 2 eee ee eee 378 Coin Holders 3 sia ees ert eee 303 Cold Weather Operation 0 000 398 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 377 Compact Spare Tife sessa
15. 1 Air Outlet 7 ESC Off Switch 13 Engine Start Stop Button 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Uconnect System Hard Controls 14 Trunk Release Button 3 Hazard Switch 9 SD Memory Card Slot 15 Dimmer Controls 4 Uconnect System 10 Power Outlet 16 Hood Release 5 Climate Control Hard Controls 11 CD DVD Slot 17 Headlight Switch 6 Glove Compartment 12 Storage Compartment 18 Paddle Shifters 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 040367964 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 2 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on zpQ 3 Turn Signal Indicators If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 4 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped 4 5 High Beam Indicator eD This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever for ward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward
16. 461 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 450 Premium System 00 0000 00a ee 464 Radial Ply Tires 12s emis RR bres 450 General Information llle 469 Tite Typess 2 does s dovete me Es 451 W FUEL REQUIREMENTS 0 469 Run Flat Tires If Equipped 452 6 4L Engine Spare Tires If Equipped 453 Reformulated Gasoline 470 Tire SDIDDIGE sesse pisce eue Fur re p eer p RU 455 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 470 Tread Wear Indicators 0 455 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 471 Life Of Tite css ke eR Ik eR 456 MMT In Gasoline 000000 471 Replacement Tires gt os oco sesoses naerma 457 Materials Added To Fuel 472 E TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 458 Fuel System Cautions 00 472 394 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Carbon Monoxide Warnings 473 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 479 B ADDING FUEL 1 26 e n n uwd 474 Overloading edem enm 479 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release 477 Loading 4 vien ERO WESS oS 480 B VEHICLE LOADING i 43e xr eaa 478 EM TRAILER TOWING i i saesa Ri 480 Vehicle Certification Label 478 Wi RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR agg METOBHOME ETC ace emhara cages s een ee STARTING AND OPERATING 395
17. Amplifier ral 31 25 Amp Natu Power Seats ral 32 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module Cluster 33 15 Amp Blue Ignition Switch Wireless Module 552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 34 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module Clock 35 10 Amp Red Battery Sensor 36 Fuse Spare 37 15 Amp Blue Radio 38 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest 40 m Fuse Spare 41 Fuse Spare 42 30 Amp Pink Rear Defrost 43 25 Amp Natu Rear Heated Seats Steering Wheel ral 44 10 Amp Red Park Assist Blind Spot Camera 45 15 Amp Blue Cluster Rearview Mirror Compass 46 10 Amp Red Adaptive Cruise Control 47 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front Lighting 48 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 49 Fuse Spare 50 Fuse Spare 51 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats 52 10 Amp Red Heated Cupholders Rear Heated Seat Switches 53 10 Amp Red HVAC Module In Car Temperature Sensor 54 Fuse Spare 55 Fuse Spare 56 E Fuse Spare 57 Fuse Spare 58 10 Amp Red Airbag Module 59 Fuse Spare 60 Fuse Spare 61 Fuse Spare 62 Fuse Spare 63 Fuse Spare 55
18. Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings To change the Voice Response Length touch the Brief or Detailed soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357 e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touchscreen button soft key is pressed Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster If Equipped When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route To make your selection touch the Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Fuel Saver Display In Cluster If Equipped The ECO message is located in the instrument cluster display this message can be turned
19. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 2 10 INTRODUCTION catestetetecsedeatasesen tp iende Saee e eni Rida dd 3 HEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE sisse eee 9 Il UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 0 0 0 e 103 mm UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL leen 309 A STARTING AND OPERATING avia Deuda theod kv debe weke Dau v pa ta a HR 391 mm WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 even sa e E RE EEEY VERE ERE UI ERE RE d 481 m MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4299 53 pp 33 CEA DUCI ERE TTE ESI UR SU RR RU Na 507 MAINTENANCE BCHEDUDES 426i tud cet S OR ERN nese Ete OE demand doe ke 563 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 46 ebrei ERES REX RERET CREER RR IA 581 9 INDEX peda 591 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS B INTRODUCTION eeeeennn nnn BBR 4 Bi VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 6 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 4 BM VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 7 E WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 6 4 INTRODUCTION EBENEN INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and
20. Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355 Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 8 4 Settings Press the More soft key then press the Settings soft key to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time When making a selection press the soft key to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or press the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings Display After pressing the Display soft key the following settings will be available e Displa
21. categories of SN The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W 40 or equivalent MOPAR engine oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12633 for use in all operating temperatures Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher 562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sa Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Use only ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Fail ure to use ATF 4 fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission We recommend MOPAR ATF 4 fluid Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 brake fluid If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 or MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Rear Axle We recommend you use MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lu bricant SAE 75W 90 API GL 5 in addition to MOPAR Friction Modifier Hypoid Gear Additive MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 564 Required Maintenance Intervals M A N T E N A N Cc I S e H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N Cc E S ie H E B U L E S 8 564 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
22. ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will us
23. the ESC Le Activation Malfunction Indicator Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESC and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible 436 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings D Lars rg v NO 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load Code TIN 5 Maximum Pressure 2 Size Designation 6 Treadwear Traction and 3 Service Description Temperature Grades NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 437 e Temporary spare tires are designed
24. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly re strained in a vehicle with a rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode a Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the sea
25. Display Clock Please select a setting Safety Assistance Exit Lights Ce Uconnect 4 3 Soft Keys Display e Brightness Touch the Brightness soft key to change this display When in this display you may select display brightness with the headlights on and the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Mode Touch the Mode soft key to change this display When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status press and release the Day Night or Auto soft key then touch the arrow back soft key e Language Touch the Language soft key to change this display When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the English French Fran ais or Spanish Espa ol soft key to select the language preferred Then touch the arrow back soft key As you continue the information will display in the selected language E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 e Units Touch the Units soft key to change this display When in this display you may switch the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric then touch th
26. HID Bulb Number H11 D3S Serviced at Autho rized Dealer High Beam Headlamp Rear Courtesy Reading W5W Lamps Rear Compartment 562 Trunk Lamp Overhead Console Read 578 ing Lamp Visor Vanity Lamps A6220 Glove Box Lamp If 194 Equipped Door Courtesy 562 Front Park Turn Lamp 9005 3157A 556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Bulb Number Front Fog Lamp If PSX24W Equipped Front Side Marker 168 Rear Tail Lamp LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer Rear Stop Turn Lamp LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer Rear Side Marker 168 Backup Lamp 3157 Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer License 168 BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process Front Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp And Side Marker Lamp Models With Halogen Headlamps 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557 2 Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise and then pull it out of the headlamp asse
27. Included are starting operating emergency and mainte nance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 589 Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified gover
28. NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while CAUTION shifting out of PARK Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow Key Ignition Park Interlock ing precautions are not observed uw e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the engine can be turned off This helps the driver Continued avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing a complete stop ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403 the transmission in PARK This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Five Speed Automatic Transmission The transmission gear position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Inter lock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a p
29. The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress You can place a call on hold by pushing the Hold button on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls SMS Inbox or from the 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M phonebooks To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Join Calls in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold During an active call push the Hold button on the Phone main screen Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold push the Swap button on the Phone main screen Only one call can be placed on hold at a time You can also push the Phone w button to toggle between the active and held phone call Join Calls When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold push the Join Calls button on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily push the Phone Xe button or the end button on the touchscreen Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call Redial Push the Redial
30. Touch the Phone soft key 2 Touch the Dial soft key 3 The Touch Tone screen will be displayed 4 Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and touch Call To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the VR button while in a call and say 1234 or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail pass word is stored in your mobile phonebook Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls Missed Calls e All Calls These can be accessed by touching the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the w button and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect amp Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will display a pop up showing Answer or Ignore Press the Answer soft key or the button on the steering wheel to accept the call Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using you
31. are sent BaaocNUd call list will wth entry is dialed redialed Smith with all stored numbers 0305020375 Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 NOTE 1 You can replace John Smith with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to for John Smith You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls or Missed Calls You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone These commands can be used during a phone call after pushing the Uconnect amp Voice Command button on the steering wheel Please note the call will be muted while the VR session is active 6 Send dial tones for automated systems is available while a call is active This is an example that uses a Phonebook Record named Voicemail Password 7 Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but only the first number encountered in a contact name will be sent For example if there is a number stored in the Home and Work numbers for the contact Voice mail password only the Home number will be sent 8 If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth then these commands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook
32. dam odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things into the passenger compartment In addition have the To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised information for lubrication or oil change Replace as required A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525 CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine e Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter an
33. do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be mission shifting occurring moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever m WARNING 1 Turn the engine OFF Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener 2 Firmly apply the parking brake ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could Continued 502 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3 Remove the rubber liner from the storage tray located next to the shifter on the center console 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port in the left side of the storage bin and push and hold the override release lever in 051210780 Shift Lever Override 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the rubber storage bin liner EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 503 T
34. position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE R This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL N Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle 408 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission da
35. www tc gc ca roadsafety 588 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles
36. 9ii e m e Rond 457 Reporting Safety Defects 0 0 0 587 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 314 Restraint Head s ae hia e e ae ewan ha aa ca 205 Restraints Child 0 0 0 0 00 00 eee eae 75 Restraints Occupant 000004 46 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 00 500 Rotation Tires 2 0 0 00 eee 460 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 99 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 102 Safety Defects Reporting llle 587 Safety Exhaust Gas eregi benedika t kma 98 Safety Information Tire esa iess oaei a iaeaea 436 Safety JIS naeia Ron Ge a E A RE a a 98 Schedule Maintenance sese 564 Seat Belt Maintenance llle 543 Seat Belt Reminder 2er tl ram tete 58 Seat Belis eoe race E dee er wie eae st 46 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 55 And Pregnant Women llle 59 Child R straint i es Gi eee eae 75 Extender i ae repr es a e eas reg 60 Front Seat ded eh exe Readies 50 INSpeCHON aedi sede EE rera i RR 99 Operating Instructions 51 Pr terisiOners ia uoa Fase dco due ed aed 58 Rear Seat e fa ss sys 44ers REG Pe REIHE ROG 50 Untwisting Procedure 00000 55 DOS i ka ek eS Oe ae ee ee hes wee 197 Adjustment 22s ae ead eS aed E a eS 197 Easy Entry xke dee RES Red Ra 213 606 INDEX eae Head Restraints 0 0 0 eee ee eee 205 Heated 5 2e Is te de eae menta aoe Eee
37. ABS is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop The clicking sound of solenoid valves Brake pedal pulsations Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip ment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capa bility Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued 426 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the cond
38. AutoStick mode the transmission will shift up or down when is manually selected by the driver using the shift lever or the shift paddles if equipped unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen except as described below If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode the transmission will automatically shift up when maxi mum engine speed is reached 412 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e If AutoStick is engaged while in SPORT mode the e The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low transmission will remain in the selected gear even of a vehicle speed when maximum engine speed is reached The trans mission will upshift only when commanded by the driver Engine overspeed protection will be provided by fuel cut off at or near redline Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en gaged The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to prevent engine lugging and will To disengage AutoStick mode hold the shift lever to the display the current gear right or press and hold the shift paddle if equipped until D is once again displayed in the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal The transmission will aut
39. Axle Weight Rating GAWR front Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear Vehicle Identification Number VIN Type of Vehicle Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR es STARTING AND OPERATING 479 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure tha
40. CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its WARNING Continued first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This n should be considered a normal part of the break in and It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area not interpreted as an indication of difficulty Please check inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during riding un these areas are more likely to be seriously the break in period Add oil as required injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your SAFETY TIPS vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Transporting Passengers ones ansp 9 9 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO using a seat belt properly AREA WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can Continued Continued en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 WARNING Continued eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO foll
41. Diagnostic System Onboard 510 Dimmer Switch Headlight 221 Dipsticks Oil Engine icerum oem epe es 514 Power Steering miresep aan aipin eS aetas 421 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 531 Door Locks 4 sc eene x e REY On 30 Door Locks Automatic leen 33 506 INDEX eee Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing WAtBEx ou iri oed quiet ips bd tat ecd el din dd 418 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy 334 Electrical Power Outlets ss coson egora mace draa 294 Electric Rear Window Defrost 306 Electric Remote Mirrors eese 113 Electronic Brake Control System 426 Anti Lock Brake System lisse 426 Brake Assist System 000000005 427 Traction Control System 0005 427 Electronic Power Distribution Center Fuses 544 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 236 Electronic Stability Control ESC issus 428 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 276 Emergency Deck Lid Release sisse 45 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 500 Hazard Warning Flasher 4 482 Jump Starting is sese was Ae 496 Overheating oe fendi de Gene RE Ra e eR teas 482 Emergency Trunk Release 4 45 Emission Control System Maintenance 510 ENGNG is iss ae ae Hae deoa e Ro waked
42. ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 429 e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position WARNING The Electronic Stability Control System ESC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent all accidents including those resulting from exces sive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro priate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has three available operating modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC When ever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations The ESC should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs 5 Partial Off The Partial Off mode is inte
43. FCW OFF FCW This light warns the driver of a potential colli OFF sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator Se ae iv This light will turn on to indicate the wind shield washer fluid is low e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Malfunction This light will turn on when a ACC is not Ke operating and needs service For further infor mation refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle EVIC Red Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar e Trunk Ajar P e Oil Pressure Warning Light This light will turn on to indicate that the trunk may be ajar RET This light indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show
44. HI one for LO and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HI level heating Press the switch a second time to select LO level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF If the HI level heating is selected the system will auto matically switch to LO level heating after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the LO level setting also turns OFF automatically after approximately 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ventilated Seats If Equipped On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw air from the seat surface through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient tempera tures The ventilated seats can be operated using the Uconnect System Front Ventilated Seat Operation Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect display SAT browse audio a Player OFF ser amp More 0364013994 af Controls Climate Controls Soft Key Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level ventilation Press the soft
45. Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control If Equipped The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automat ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE e Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system
46. If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361 caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Hill Start Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key until a check mark appear
47. If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains visible sediment have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant antifreeze conforming to MS 12106 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE NOTE Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead ESAE to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than needed to be added to the system please contact your specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en local authorized dealer gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine Selection Of Coolant damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in ant is different and should not be mixed with Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529 CAUTION Continued Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
48. NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 12 To Arm TheSystem 0 00000 19 Keyless Ignition Node KIN 12 To Disarm The Syste eo csetera maeaea 20 Key Pob iss ess ee cae ba oa ea ae als 13 Security System Manual Override 21 Ignition Or Accessory On Message 14 B ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED 21 WM SENTRY KEY 000 000004 16 Mi REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE 22 Replacement Keys 0000055 17 To Unlock The Doors ssl 22 Customer Key Programming 18 To Lock The Dooie cga anea 50000 23 General Information 00 18 To Unlatch The Trunk 000 24 ll VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED 18 O Using The Panic Alarm 24 Rearming Of The System 19 Programming Additional Transmitters 24 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Transmitter Battery Replacement 25 B TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE 44 General Information 04 26 W TRUNK SAFETY WARNING 45 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 27 Trunk
49. Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 on your mobile phone keypad you can utilize the touchscreen or push the Sve button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can push the Eve button and say Send 3 7 4 6 Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries For example if you previously created a Phone book entry with First and or Last Name as Voicemail Password then if you push the AVR button and say Send Voicemail Password the Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored You may
50. Push the Phone button on your steering wheel to begin 2 After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial 151 1234 5555 3 The Uconnect Phone will dial the number 151 1234 5555 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name 1 Push the Phone button on your steering wheel to begin 2 After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call John Doe Mobile 3 The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe Call Controls The touchscreen allows you to control the following call features Answer End Ignore Hold unhold Mute unmute Transfer the call to from the phone Swap two active calls Join two active calls together 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Touch Tone Number Entry 68 yf FM91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Ww 72 R t calls gt x 1 Push the Phone button on the touchscreen Siekia Ai S5 AnaConda Calis YY Axel Schweiss 2 Push the Dial button on the touchscreen 3 The Touch Tone screen will be displayed Buddy s Pizza 4 X5 248 990 6543 x James Buttler Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to enter the number and push Call L YY D Dennett To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR push the VR vn button on your steering wheel while in a e sa LAEN a NS ES call and say Send 1234
51. Rl due 201 Height Adjustment 0 005 197 Memory 2e c oe s Rc Rs eee Oe c 209 POW E ux ERROR 3c mede ERR ee 197 Rear Folding une dears cg ga ties yaaa deh 207 Seatback Release llle eee 207 TUNE ss2xccmem ed nr 39e e XT REGN 197 Security Alarm ueque abb ge epe ute 4 18 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze LL 561 selection of Oll 1 2 ERR bL RIA ES 514 Sentry Key Immobilizer 16 Sentry Key Programming 06 18 Sentry Key Replacement ois ss sysop icri doina 17 Service Assistante Wz cc aac EY Y dr RR RE 583 Service Contract esre errari RR ERR SU EE ES 585 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 316 Service Manuals 0000 eee ees 588 E hk Beton ai Stk at d Bas ant 401 Automatic Transmission ss 401 shift Lever Override s s do see derat rena 501 Shoulder Belts 4 scies Rn 50 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 55 Side Airbase csch ese v Pede es See re ed es 70 Side View Mirror Adjustment 111 Signals TUM 3 4 0 apices patadas a RE heh S 102 SmartBeams llle 217 Snow Chains Tire Chains 00 458 SNOW Tues a kr ra kr egre 452 Sound System Kicket gig ayo kk m re RS PETERE 374 Spare Tire cus epe ain Che Bao 3e quer Be 453 Spark Plugs is aes eir t ea eese ta 561 Specifications Fuel Gasoline llle 561 cr 561 Speed Control Cruise Control is
52. SPORT soft key can also be found on the SRT Performance Page press the SRT amp MORE button and the SRT Performance Page button then the SPORT button on the display screen This mode will set suspension for maximum performance handling and is intended for spirited driving NOTE The SPORT setting will provide a firmer ride e When SPORT mode is enabled a shock symbol will light up in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster Description in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information e 414 STARTING AND OPERATING ME AUTO mode will provide a sporty comfortable ride where as SPORT or TRACK will be a firmer sportier suspension with better handling Track Mode This mode includes SPORT suspension and affects transmission shifting in either Auto or Manual mode Refer to AutoStick in Starting And Operating for further information In TRACK mode the transmission has a sportier more aggressive shift pattern In Manual mode the transmission will hold gear at redline during manual shifting console shifter or paddle shifters When TRACK mode is enabled a flag symbol will light up in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster Description in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 415 LAUNCH MODE IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum v
53. TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Never place or install floor mats or other floor e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob secured to prevent them from moving and interfer jects can become trapped under the brake pedal ing with the pedals or the ability to control the and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle vehicle control e Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top If required mounting posts must be properly in of already installed floor mats Additional floor stalled if not equipped from the factory mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or pedal area and interfere with the pedals mounting can cause interference with the brake Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have control of the vehicle been removed for cleaning Continued 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulge
54. The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways However it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you NOTE e If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you ACC will maintain a fixed set speed e If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration not to exceed the original set speed automatically to maintain a preset following distance while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience system It is not a substitute for active driving involvement It
55. a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating tempera
56. and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h I Side Monitoring Rear Monitoring 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed of less than 15 mph 24 km h and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph 24 km h the warning light will not illuminate Overtaking Approaching The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage berms etc However occasionally the system may alert on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Overtaking Passing Stationary Objects The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended
57. and it may give false readings NUNT 6 7 8 9 Compass Variance Map 040506040 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Perform Compass Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and it may need to be calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Audio After pressing the Audio soft key the following settings will be available e Balance Fade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the back arrow soft key NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touch the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the back arrow soft key ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR I
58. and the child restraint is allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be re moved Yes Center position only may be re moved Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Yes In positions with cinching latch plates CINCH the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR re tractor Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the car seat Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 4 O1 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the s
59. button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh e Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will e Pressing the RES button once will result in a continue to decrease until the button is released then 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the new set speed will be established the button results in an increase of 2 km h Metric Speed kmlh e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established e Pressing the SET button once will result in a 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 2 km h 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE
60. button on the touchscreen or push the Phone button and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 NOTE The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth connection It is recommended to push the transfer button on the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows 1 Press the w button to begin 2 After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the touchscreen The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may
61. child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks a
62. commands can be spoken from amy screen while a call is active after pushing the Uconnect voice command button e VR on the steering whoo 4 Ea me 4212 Send Voicemail Number is Dial Tones for dialed numbers stored in for 12344 Voicemail are sent Password are sent BaaocNUd call list will wth entry is dialed redialed Smith with all stored numbers 0305020375 Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 NOTE e e You can replace John Smith with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to for John Smith You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls or Missed Calls Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone You can replace 4 with any message number shown y 8 on the screen e If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth than these commands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook e Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes General Information This device co
63. contains aluminum components Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533 Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emis sions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally Continued WARNING Continued high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing 7 the cap Add fluid to bring the level u
64. coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine cool ant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replacement To prevent reduc ing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conform ing to MS 12106 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 and distilled water Use higher concen trations not to exceed 7076 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are an
65. dde ordo da eed ade x Seen estes 523 Headlight Washers s asd seme d menie 523 Head Restraints llle 205 Head Rests l l 205 Heated Mirrors llle merene 114 Heated Seats ss Rune Weg ew 201 Heater Engine Block 0 0 00 0 eee 400 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 221 Halll Start Assist iie a eer ee EORR ES 432 Holder Coin llle 303 Ignition Key es oui gies ea cb aspe Pe AN ERAT eS Illuminated Entry Immobilizer Sentry Key 04 Infant Restraint llle Inside Rearview Mirror l l Instrument Cluster 000 cee eee ee Instrument Panel and Controls 600 INDEX eee Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 543 Interior Appearance Care llle 541 Interior Lights 22 04 22r e Re re 224 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 226 Introduction sereset ee fe hese ES E Ene eed 4 iPod USB MP3 Control Bluetooth Streaming Audio 155 Jump Staring is cae acs eus ane ee alate eas 496 Key In Reminder 0 0 0 dinit en eee 14 Keyless Enter N Go 0 000000004 35 Keyless Entry Systemi saet erena a Sae ee eee 22 Keyless G0 55 os epe ed dese nie er osos 12 Key Programming llle 18 Key Replacement llle eese 17 Co T 12 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 16 Kicker Sound System 0 00000000004 374 Knee Bolster igs a cie take tes thane x a Gd 60
66. door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365 Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle e Personal Settings Linked To FOB If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Memory Linked To FOB soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start After pressing the Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start soft key the following settings will be available e Horn With Remote St
67. for temporary e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design emergency use only Temporary high pressure com standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded pact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT the sidewall preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or S Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in 438 STARTING AND OPERATING ME EXAMPLE R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and
68. format display setting Touch the Time Format soft key until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting indicating that the setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Show Time In Status Bar If Equipped When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft key until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Front Collision Sensitivity If Equipped The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359 a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experi ence To change the FCW status touch and release the OFF Near or Far button Then touch the arrow back soft key For further information ref
69. found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity 454 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the
70. how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer e If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light y This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer e f a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off e If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If
71. i To Turn Off 0 ee eee 248 ParkSense Sensors llle 269 To Resume Speed 00006 248 Rar kocnee Warne Diepiay To Vary The Speed Setting 249 Pato Epi eet eieaa deee Setting The Following Distance In ACC 250 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense 273 on e ERR 255 Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts 273 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu 255 OT TM Eme Tu EA 274 Display Warnings And Maintenance eat Cleaning The ParkSense System 275 ae AE Bii ParkSense System Usage Precautions 275 General Information lees 263 E PARKVIEWG REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode 263 EQUIPPED 1 my e Ree DURS F 276 Forward Collision Warning If Equipped 266 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Turning ParkView On Or Off With Touchscreen Radio lesen 278 Bl OVERHEAD CONSOLE 00 0 279 Front Map Reading Lights 279 Courtesy LightS iios see e Re RR GR 280 Sunglasses Bin Door 00 281 ll GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 281 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink 283 Programming A Rolling Code 283 Programming A Non Rolling Code 285 Canadian Gate Operator Programming 287 Using HomeLink sn 288 DOCULILY sata ai
72. i i i i HEATED i q EI Ju IS de 18 t jor S p TEM ique B ub i i g i i i 3 i JE i Li H g i E 3 3 H i i p ied O Po T ein E a Ed i i l E 3 i E 8 i 3 eLecraome CONTROL OFF 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cau tions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title 010805185 VIN Location The vehicle identification number VIN is also located on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart ment INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING LEES Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death 010840680 VIN Location
73. in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 wiper sensitivity Setting 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may red
74. is always the driver s responsibil ity to be attentive of road traffic and weather conditions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your complete attention is always re quired while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury The ACC system Does not react to pedestrians oncoming vehicles and stationary objects e g a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Continued 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued e When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp when driving on roads that are winding icy snow covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill WARNING Continued e Cannot take street traffic and weather condi tions into account and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings e Can only apply a maximum of 40 of the vehi cle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop You should switch off the ACC system When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet heavy traffic and complex driving situations i e in highway construction zones Continued slopes
75. is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Unavailable there may be a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer NE 156789mi 102 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC IB AEEVZSU ESL 2 P R N D S 032363725 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Unavailable Warning Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 Adding A Trailer Hitch The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance of ACC If there is a noticeable change in performance following the installation of a trailer hitch or if the ACC performance does not return to normal after removing the trailer hitch see your authorized dealer Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel or a vehicle merging in from a side lane There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in an
76. is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column 022641324 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Knee Bolster 3 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Knee Bolster THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 NOTE The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to new Federal regulations for Ad vanced Air Bags The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be eq
77. key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF 1 Player Controls Climate Nav Phone amp More L 0309001743 Heated Seats Soft Keys NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal Hl level If the Hl level setting is selected the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 system will automatically switch to LO level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automati cally after a maximum of 45 minutes Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Rear Heated Seats On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats the seats closest to the doors are heated The controls for these seats are located on the rear of the center console You can choose from HI LO or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for
78. lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective e A Turn Signal On message will appear in the EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi 1 6 km with either turn signal on Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Map Reading Lights second time The lights will also turn on when the The front ma
79. loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat ing speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 451 Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria e The tire has not been driven on when flat e The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable e The puncture is no greater than 14 6 mm Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Code Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons spring summer fall and winter Traction levels may vary be tween different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect th
80. milliseconds Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a large quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflates in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of th
81. more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages 3 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the car seat Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 5 If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt WARNING When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
82. must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543 Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage ca
83. nen 00a 224 E WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 225 Intermittent Wiper System 226 Wiper Operation s s sesse crs depasesc ss 226 Windshield Washers lesus 227 Mist Feature osi ier eg depo ardeenits 228 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only 228 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 228 Bl TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN 230 ll POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED 231 ll HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED 232 E ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED ll ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL TF EQUIPPED 3 2 3 Cease ae IURE TO ACV ALES ves eee we E VASE To Set A Desired Speed 0 0 To Deactivate eee To Resume Speed 000000 To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing ll ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED cc cece eee eee Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC TO AcliVdte ule eee aed Sas aw ks ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 To Set A Desired ACC Speed vec eR 246 W PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST To Cancel isse ieee ee a ee eae
84. not be applicable with the available mobile service and area The Uconnect amp Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect amp Phone Roadside Assistance Towing Assistance If you need roadside towing assistance 1 Push the button to begin 2 After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Roadside Assistance or say Towing Assistance NOTE The roadside towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 800 363 4869 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for out side Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Roadside Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Roadside Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to push numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect
85. not on a phone call after pushing the Uconnect voice command button ef va on the steenng wheel System Guided Map screen oe A The System will System Guided Dialog for will be os choose an alternate Dialog to enter finding copied displayed route th t does not Se restaurants that include the next turn are near to your current location ent Navigation Route will not be 0475016867 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 NOTE WARNING 1 You can also say Find City Find Favorite Find Play by Category Find Play by Name Find Re cently Found Where to or Go Home e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured 2 You can say Find Nearest then Restaurant Fuel or killed Transit Lodging Shopping Bank Enter e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your tainment Recreation Attractions Commu vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat nity Auto Services Hospitals Parking Air belts In a collision people riding in these areas are port Police Stations Fire Stations or Auto more likely to be seriously injured or killed Dealers Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold using a seat belt properly face and s
86. of the SAFE range on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API categories of SN The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic SAE 0W 40 engine oil or equivalent meeting the require ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12633 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity Use Pennzoil Ultra 0W 40 engine or equivalent MOPAR oil meeting the Chrysler Material Standard MS 12633 for use in all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Veh
87. on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Clock After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings will be available e Sync With GPS Time If Equipped When in this display you may automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync with GPS Time setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting indicating that the setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Set Time Hours When in this display you may adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the hours up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Hon e Set Time Minutes When in this display you may adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the minutes up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Hon e Time Format When in this display you may select the time
88. on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 3 ft 30cm 1 m Green 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to Continued WARNING Continued check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the drive
89. operation axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight press the button a second time over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307 CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS ll INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 311 BB INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 312 ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 313 ll ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC elk ERU Re 323 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays 262 tessa b reas 325 EVIC White Telltale Lights sss 327 EVIC Amber Telltale Lights 328 EVIC Red Telltale Lights 329
90. or descending down hill This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between 3 long 2 me dium and 1 short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC NE 156789mi 102 ACC 200 km h Distance 3 Distance Set 3 long 032363707 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 NE 156789mi 102 ACC 200 km h Distance 2 u P LI 032363708 Distance Set 2 medium 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es NE 156789mi ACC 200 km h Distance 1 102 032363709 Distance Set 1 short To change the distance setting press the Distance button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting adjusts between 3 long 2 medium and 1 short If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi cator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane o
91. reduced Full Off This mode is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be used on any public roadways In this mode all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF To enter the Full Off mode press and hold the ESC Off switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running After five seconds a ee STARTING AND OPERATING 431 chime will sound the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light will illuminate and the ESC OFF mes sage will display in the vehicle odometer Press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message The ESC OFF message may appear in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To turn ESC ON again momentarily press the ESC Off switch NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved into the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur when the message was previously cleared WARNING In the ESC Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled There fore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability E
92. reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 WARNING Continued E on er UBIN ENGINE e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter 1 Press and hold the brake pedal If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel and vehicle e If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster 2 Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster hold it ram battery or the battery in another vehicle This type 3 Press and release the ENGINE START STOP button of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer once to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information 400 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10
93. s cetra ee 453 Computer Trip Travel onnaa aana 335 Connector UCIiisveered ere bw eeu eges 373 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 373 Conserving Fuel asser rem esee E em eb 334 Console Floor llle 303 ee INDEX 595 Contract Services 4 003 d Roe y ee ues 585 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 530 Cooling System use sss eram ex he a ae 526 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 529 Coolant Capacity ec eR ERE RE s 560 Coolant Levels ipa sasra sara Egna s ees 527 Disposal of Used Coolant i iosi soete ssaa s 531 Drain Flush and Refill lesu 527 Inspection saesae hoe De ec Rom AEG e ceres 531 Points to Remember 00505 532 Pressure Cap c4 RR eb toad RS 530 Radiator Cap o ceess 6r RR eee pease os 530 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 528 Corrosion Protection 2 6 eee eee 538 Cruise Control Speed Control 240 Cupholders 3 02 ougo09 i Samie ope elena ES 298 Customer Assistance llle 583 Data Recorder Event 0 0 0 0 0 cee eee 74 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 225 Daytime Running Lights 0 218 Dealer Service 6 ee 512 Deck Lid Emergency Release 0 45 Deck Lid Power Release 0 00002 eae 44 Defroster Rear Window llle 306 Defroster Windshield llle 100 Delay Intermittent Wipers lille 226
94. stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so ee STARTING AND OPERATING 419 WARNING Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stopping distances Therefore after driving through stand ing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your pas sengers and others around you CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Ne
95. system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 2 M 83 F i Trip A 0 0mi Tire Pst Vehicle Info System Setup 56789 mi 041040876 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e Radio Info Fuel Economy 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BEEN e Vehicle Speed e Trip Info Tire Pressure Vehicle Info Stored Warning Messages e Performance Features e Turn Menu OFF The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel 040909599 EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons UP Arrow Button A Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll upward through the main menu and Vehicle Info and Trip Info sub menus Fuel Economy Vehicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages Trip Info Ve hicle Speed and T
96. the light is flashing when the engine is running immedi ate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H or 260 F this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H or 260 F a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Transmission Temperature Warning Light temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this light turns on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera G This light indicates that the transmission fluid ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmissio
97. the brake linings and replace if necessary Q1 Inspect the CV joints a a LE Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing L Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 574 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 102 Months Maintenance Ser Schedule vice Schedule Q1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil A Rotate tires filter 1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air J Rotate tires cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary 0 CC C O C M A l N T E N A N ie E S ie H E B U L E S 8 Odometer Reading D
98. the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Cancel The system will disable normal Cruise Control without erasing the memory if You softly tap or depress the brake pedal You press the CANCEL button The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates To Resume Press the RES button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if You push and release the ON OFF button 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME You turn off the ignition You switch off ESC If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated the system will return to the last driver setting ACC or Normal Cruise Control Forward Collision Warning If Equipped The Forward Collision Warning FCW system provides the driver with audible and visual warnings within the EVIC when it detects a potential frontal collision The warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react and avoid the potential collision FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller EBC wheel speed sensors i e to calculate a probable rear end collision When the system determines that a rear end collision is p
99. the left side of both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the the instrument panel This switch controls the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged operation of the headlights parking lights instru ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming inte WARNING rior lights and fog lights Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 031463855 Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light op eration Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode
100. the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap 306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Wi D The weight and position of cargo and passengers can eer men EC SIE change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per ste The rear window defroster button is located on sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your the climate control Press this button to turn on the vehicle rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos when the rear window defroster is on The rear window sible defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear minutes For an additional five minutes of
101. the set speed can be decreased by pressing the SET button The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U S mph or Metric km h units U S Speed mph e Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is re flected in the EVIC display Metric Speed kmlh Pressing the SET button once will result in a 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 2 km h If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is re flected in the EVIC display NOTE e When you use the SET button to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle e The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop e The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill
102. the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Hill Start Assist If Equipped Touch the Hill Start Assist soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 Lights e Illuminated Approach Touch the Illuminated Approach soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Ap proach status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the back arrow soft key e Headlights With Wipers Touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key to change this display When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers ar
103. this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Speed Adjusted Volume Touch the Speed Adjusted Volume soft key to change this display This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the OFF 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the back arrow soft key e Surround Sound If Equipped Touch the Surround Sound soft key to change this display This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection press the Surround Sound soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the back arrow soft key Phone Bluetooth e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Supplement SIRIUS Setup e Channel Skip SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip Then touch the back arrow soft key e Subscription Info New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re subscribe
104. this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387 Manual Operation Override The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation con trol The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro sion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 OAT Organic Additive Technology coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for p
105. to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their Opposing Traffic vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear ue of the vehicle is Ber The RCP system will The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver Continued 030405522 RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph 5 km h to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph 32 km h such as in parking lot situations UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 NOTE In a parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind
106. to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC Ii 14D482 126 AC Third Edition Printed in U S A
107. to the ground This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses 6 and 7 to reach 3 Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the deflated tire ground This will provide the best positioning of the EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491 4 Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 onto the valve stem 5 Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire C Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated Tire e Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE FIT kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL e After pressing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn Off the TIREFIT kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect the Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode Press the Power Button 4 to turn On the TIREFIT kit
108. vehicle or 1f the Brake Warning Light remains on with the in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle l l ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM e Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased failure and a collision vehicle stability and brake performance under most e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav braking conditions The system automatically pumps ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in Wheel lock up PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately The Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 425 When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the
109. vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur NOTE If the ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment e If the sensor is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE Installing a vehicle front end protector or an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille
110. vehicle is not moving Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is in Drive While holding the brake rapidly apply the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle The engine speed will hold at approximately 1825 RPM for the quickest launch Messages will appear in the cluster EVIC display to inform the driver if one or more of the above conditions 3 through 6 have not been met When conditions 3 through 6 have been met the cluster EVIC display will read Launch Ready Release Brake Release the brake and continue to hold wide open throttle to launch 8 Keep the vehicle pointed straight Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches 62 mph 100 kph at which point the ESC system continues in ESC Full ON mode Activating Launch Control again from this state will require pressing the ESC OFF button twice Repeat steps 3 through 8 Launch control will abort before launch completion and display Launch Aborted in the cluster under any the following conditions The accelerator pedal is released during launch ESC system continues in ESC Full ON The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer moving in a straight line ESC system continues in ESC Full ON The ESC OFF button is pressed to change the system to another mode One press puts the ESC system into ESC Full On ee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 WARNING Rapid accele
111. warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity ee STARTING AND OPERATING 455 WARNING Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may ca
112. when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483 WARNI heat the mode control to floor and the blower control NING to high This allows the heater core to act as a You or others can be badly burned by hot engine supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If from the engine cooling system you see or hear steam coming from under the hood CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle
113. which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices e Show Paired Phones e Connect My Phone Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the high est priority paired phone and or Audio Device within range If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device follow these steps 1 Push the Settings button on the touchscreen 2 Push the Paired Phone or Paired Audio Source button on the touchscreen 3 Push to select the particular Phone or the particular Audio Device ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 4 Push the X to exit out of the Settings screen Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device T 2 6 Push the Settings button on the touchscreen Push the Paired Phone or Audio Device button on the touchscreen Push the button located to the right of the device name The options pop up will be displayed Push the Disconnect Device button on the touch Screen Push the X to exit out of the Settings screen Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device 1 Push the Settings button on the touchscreen 2 4 5 6 Push the Pair Phone or Audio Device button on the touchscreen Push the button located to the right of the device name for a different
114. will be recalled with a Passive Entry Unlock into the driver s door using the Key Fob linked to position 2 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons S 1 or 2 on the driver s door during a recall When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver s seat moves depends on where you have the driver s seat positioned when you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver s seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver s seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver s seat will move
115. yourself normal position to return to low beam This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 6 Odometer Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the EVIC display It displays the gear position of the auto matic transmission NOTE
116. 000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Emergency And Towing Assistance The 911 Help numbers can only be altered These can not be deleted or the names can not be changed To change the 911 Help number follow these steps 1 Touch the Phonebook soft key from the Phone main screen 2 Touch the 911 Help soft key Touch the appropriate listing to alter Emergency for example 3 Once Emergency is touched the Edit soft key ap pears Touch the Edit soft key and you will be given the choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default 4 Follow the on screen prompts to complete the task Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way c
117. 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service y 66 Months Maintenance Ser Schedule T vice Schedule Q1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E T Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires N filter 11 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air A J Rotate tires cleaner filter and replace if necessary N 1 Replace the air conditioning filter C T Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary E T Inspect the rear axle fluid S T Inspect the CV joints C T Inspect the exhaust system H T Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all E parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary B U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date 8 Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center M A l N T E N A N ie E S ie H E B U L E S 8 572 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN vice Schedule filter 1 Rotate tires 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Ser I Change the engine oil and engine oil Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a O O O C C Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires
118. 2 Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if available Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the TIREFIT kit 3 The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance 492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME NOTE If the Mode Select Knob 5 is on Air Mode and the pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 seconds As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 psi 5 Bar The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi 5 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar recommended pressure Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated pre
119. 2 or you can say Send Voice V mail Password if Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phonebook Recent Calls Recent Calls Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls Missed Calls AII Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 These can be accessed by touching the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the w button and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed You can also press the button and say Show my recent calls from any screen and the All calls screen will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect amp Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem Push the Phone button to accept the call You can also push the answer button on the touchscreen or push the caller ID box Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Push the Phone w button answer button on the touchscreen or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE
120. 3 Attaching Strap B Tether Anchor 4 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the drivetrain engine transmission clutch and rear axle in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 500 mi 800 km After the initial 60 mi 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in However wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil is a high performance synthetic lubricant the transmission fluid and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high quality and energy conserving Oil fluid and lubricant changes should be consistent with antici pated climate and conditions under which vehicle opera tions will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle
121. 3 From the Phone main screen select phonebook From the phonebook screen select the Favorites soft key and then select the soft key located to the right of the phonebook record Select an empty entry and touch 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN the on that selected entry When the Options pop up appears touch Add from Mobile You will then be asked which contact and number to choose from your mobile phonebook When complete the new favorite will be shown 68 qf FM E nA 10 10 NW 54 out Phonebook gt f P Voicemail Motie Add from Mobile Favorites Empty 9h Mom s Cell 0305016956 Add From Mobile To Remove A Favorite 1 To remove a Favorite select phonebook from the Phone main screen 2 Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and then touch the Options soft key 3 Touch the next to the Favorite you would like to remove ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 68 FM91 7 10 10 NW 54 out ww 72 Emergency And Towing Assistance Phonebook gt Favorites The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers amp Voicemail a can only be altered These cannot be deleted and the names cannot be changed E Buddy s Pizza To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers follow these steps f Mom s Cell 5 Tae 1 Touch the Phonebook soft key from the Phone main 5 screen be SAU i D u dut 2 Touch the Favorites
122. 31 inso PPP aha ke vote ed tay 40 Power Steering Fluid 2004 562 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 59 Pretensioners beat Bellos erpa Er Cie EI e e an Ra 58 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 22 Radial Ply Tires Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap Radio Operation cedi GE eR aUe RI ten 377 Radio Remote Controls llle 375 Rain Sensitive Wiper System sess 228 Rear Axle Differential lessen 537 Rear Camera e mia cans d EPERE EE a 276 Rear Cupholder sce tera ee aa tla genes 301 Rear ParkSense System 0 0 2 0 mistoa e 268 Rear Seat Folding 2 207 Rear Window Defroster llle 306 Rear Window Features 00000000 306 Recorder Event Data llle 74 Recreational Towing 0 0 00 eee eee 480 Reformulated Gasoline 000000005 470 Refrigerant nas t ei ties dE RP ERREUR eed 519 Reminder Lights On 6 spad nent Eia 219 Reminder Seat Belt 0 000 000 0000 cee eee 58 Remote Control Starting System sse esae ha ea Cen 27 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 22 en INDEX 605 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 375 Remote Starting System 6 6 eee 27 Remote Trunk Release llle 44 Replacement Bulbs 000000004 555 Replacement Keys i5 cubes 8 Eee ges 17 Replacement Parts dere ker jr On dera 512 Replacement Tires 2 2 is
123. 4 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 64 25 Amp Natu Rear Windows ral 65 10 Amp Red Airbag Module 66 m Fuse Spare 67 15 Amp Blue Run Sense 68 15 Amp Blue Illumination Rear Sunshade 69 a Fuse Spare 70 Eas m Fuse Spare VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service e g vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555 REPLACEMENT BULBS All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement Interior Bulbs Bulb Number Bulb Number Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cup Holder LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer replacement instructions For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for Exterior Bulbs Low Beam Headlamp Standard Halogen Low Beam Headlamp High Intensity Discharge
124. 5 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the f
125. 561 Tank Capacity saiet doro 9 E e EU ans 560 Fuel Optimizers cc 92ic ri enrii e RI 334 Fuel Saver 0 ee eee 334 lir 303 02 He Hehe a etek ie we edie tees Led 544 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 281 Gasoline Clean Air 0 oe es 470 Gasoline Fuel 2 0 0 ee eee eee 469 CONSERVING ous iio dior Hong e Wea g Le aan ae tg 334 Gasoline Reformulated 00005 470 Gauges Coolant Temperature llle 322 lj M 317 Speedometer llle 317 Tachometer i223 d ser ex Ga 313 Gear Ranges inea ases cR e Oe RR Rd 404 Gear Select Lever Override l l 501 General Information 0 0 0 0 ee eee 147 ee INDEX 599 Glass Cleaning wi aed dux dens 9E RO aod 543 Gross Axle Weight Rating lille 479 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 479 GVWR x carte ea ed gga pas exp welder eS 479 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 6 6 6 eee eee 418 Hazard Warning Flasher 04 482 Eleadlights e gore ee Pe eer ea a 557 A tomali ceelisececkeR hee ds 216 Cleaning a sz vest au eteegia e E beds 542 Delay xo lt tr hake Sv ege ie he iac bared ram 218 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 221 Lights On Reminder lesse 219 On With Wipers 0 6 0 0 eee 216 Passing 6 ea sock ates cp nos Ro ae ae enc x 221 SWCD iat amm bed a Rhea Seon eda 215 Time Delay i sananpa kae ed Rag PS 218 Washers
126. 6 6 eee 224 hus CR 224 License aede eed Ine oe Re Re eie 559 Lights On Reminder 0 00 219 a INDEX 601 LOW Fuel acere EE RR e Rea 328 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 316 Map Reading 22223 ceresc RERPRRLDAS 222 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 225 Passing uiua es e e Ee Rep eb s 221 Reading ar cbe ane Per tech Ee dn 222 Seat Belt Reminder 00000 322 Security Alarm es 319 vss C 555 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 316 Sm rtBeams eri p y mee pe s 217 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 314 Traction Controls ss es ns siie ee ee e 434 Turn Signal scant ies deere ae i 102 Vanity Mirror ennnen nE eee 114 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 313 Loading Vehicles a ze e RR oe 478 Capacities oe semanie ai d em pese a i em ie ad 480 jc p Tc T 442 602 INDEX es LOCKS E 30 Automatic Door 0 0 eee eee 33 Auto Unlock 4 222 224 m b rs 33 Child Protection is eee eee He ao RR S 34 Doof sg ci ne wa Soe RES E C REESE hee es 30 POWER DOOR x dos urea deae Sal eae n n Shale 32 Low Tire Pressure System 000 461 Lubrication Body 1 eee 522 ue INUtSa 2 63e ae Eee tate oe a ae etos 483 Maintenance Free Battery llle 516 Maintenance Procedures liess sss 513 Maintenance Schedule nnna nananana aaa 564 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 316
127. 9 R9 eR Rex YU 535 Shift ng i c o e Re EASY d 401 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 25 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 22 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 22 Tread Wear Indicators 004 455 Trip Odometer 4562256345 em xps 313 Trunk Lid Deck Lid 00 44 Trunk Release Emergency anapa 45 en INDEX 609 Trunk Release Remote Control 0 44 Turn SIGN AIS es i epa egeret eie RU E enda 220 UCIConnector leen 373 Uconnect Advanced Phone Connectivity 143 Operatori desee e Re eRe Se 128 Phone Call Features lesen 134 Phone Features 0 00 ce eee eee 139 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect8 Phone 0 0 00 eee 144 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 589 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 373 Unleaded Gasoline 0 0 0 00 0000 eee 469 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 55 Vanity NlirtOLs 3 acu as pony a8 aoa s mamaaa acr 114 Vehicle Certification Label 4 478 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 5 eo e reme 444 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Security Alarm Security Alarm 18 Vehicle Storage 2 x base e cgo Rp ee 387 Viscosity Engine Oll 22 5 vier doe e ese 515 Warning Flasher Hazard 200 482 Warni
128. ACC position until the shift lever shift selector is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever shift selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position 3908 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ENGINE START STOP Button Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The ENGINE START STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps 1 Starting with the ignition in the OFF position 2 Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition to the ACC position EVIC dis plays ACC 3 Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition to the RUN position EVIC displays RUN 4 Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF position EVIC displays OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure
129. ANEL Ss To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds The current display will reset along with other functions Units Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Units displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected SRT WARNING Measurement of vehicle statistics with the perfor mance pages is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be done on any public roadways It is recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which can jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The Performance Features include the following e 0 60 mph 0 100 km h Braking Distance es UNDERSTANDING YOUR
130. Air Bags SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats 022641517 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 EA Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed The system includes side impact sensors that are cali 2o brated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during impacts that require air bag occupant protection WARNING e Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain 022641453 SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SAB
131. CLE 51 WARNING Continued Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat NEA DDN Jr 022641457 Pulling Out The Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EE WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop erly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly i ARY iz Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Continued en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your n abdomen T
132. D Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 mHEEEE X s STARTING AND OPERATING 441 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure sure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanen
133. EDULES BEEN Schedule filter 1 Rotate tires 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service I Change the engine oil and engine oil Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months 11 Inspect the exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months 2 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary O C C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 567 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 18 Months Maintenance Service 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule T Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 2 Change the engine oil and engine oil O Rotate tires filter 1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions in
134. ERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does
135. ES OF YOUR VEHICLE Inside the center console armrest there is a removable upper storage tray that can be slid forward rearward on rails for access to the lower storage area This tray has an integrated coin holder along with additional area for small items like an ipod or phone Below the upper tray the lower storage compartment is made for larger items like CDs and tissue boxes In addition the 12 Volt power outlet USB and Aux jack are located here WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision Door Storage The door panels contain storage areas 035235231 Front Door Trim Storage es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305 Caro Area Vehicles Equipped with 64 Split Folding Rear Seat a a The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling position If the seatback is not securely locked into nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When position the seat will not provide the proper sta the seats are folded down they provide a continuous bility for child seats and or passengers An improp nearly flat extension of the load floor erly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in
136. Emergency Release i e 000ea 9 45 How To Use Remote Start 0 27 M OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS iur Ri 46 DOOR LOCKS i43bRRerRRer4e3erdk eras 30 Lap Shoulder Belts 24 24424 2444004492045 50 Manual Door Locks 00002005 30 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 55 Power Door Locks 00005 32 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 56 Child Protection Door Lock System Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR Rear Doors os eoe cesi e cr Re OR 34 JE Equipped no css kem th med 57 B KEYLESS ENTER N GO M og eats eae eu a 35 Energy Management Feature 58 B WINDOWS 0 40 Seat Belt Pretensioners 00 58 Power Windows sas seirama sarei 40 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Wind Buffeng 44 BeltAlert s ccciee ecsee ghee eae e 58 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 59 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Seat Belt Extender llle Supplemental Restraint System SRS Aur DaeS 2Seiscccanstpescieserbee eRe gas Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Event Data Recorder EDR Child Restraints llle Transporting Pels ecc 4e Rees ll ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 60 Bi SAFETY TIPS 67 74 75 97 97 Transporting Passengers liiis Exhaust Gas eene 98 aa
137. FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you NOTE In the Off setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the Uconnect display The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down e FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over head objects ground reflections objects not in the path of the car stationary objects that are far away oncom ing traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed e If the FCW becomes disabled then a warning will display on the EVIC screen 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se FCW Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Required there may be a temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions FCW will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating FCW again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer 3mi ACC FCW BIETET Service Required 035468894 ACC FCW Unavailable Service Required Warning PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 during a
138. Forward e Call Send Messages Using Soft Keys You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message 1 Touch the Phone soft key 2 Touch the messaging soft key then New Message 3 Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person you wish to send the message to ud 95 5 Messaging gt Inbox 1 Yes New 2 No 3 Okay 4 can t talk right now 5 Call me 6 I ll call you later v 18 Roms in ist D TAON Radio Player Controis Climate Nav Phone amp More Preset Message List 4 If multiple numbers are available for the contact select which number you would like to have the message sent 5 Press Send or Cancel 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Send Messages Using Voice Commands t FM 95 5 1 Press the button UNS 1 Yes 2 After the Listening prompt and the following beep Eg say Send message to John Smith mobile 3 Okay 3 After the system prompts you for what message you SE COE EC LON want to send say the message you wish to send or say elu List There are 18 preset messages FE cell you eter x While the list of defined messages are being read you can 2 X C NY x srr interrupt the system by pressing the a vi button and Radio Player Controis Climate Nav Phone amp More 0305017070 saying the message you want to send ying ge y Preset Message List After the system confirms that you want to send your i t message to Joh
139. Free dialing via Voice Call John Smith Mo bile or Dial 248 555 1212 Redialing last dialed numbers Redial Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Back View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show Recent Calls 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your Smith Mobile Screen Activated Features e e Dialing via Keypad using the touchscreen Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis played on the touchscreen Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touchscreen Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone For Uconnect customer support e US residents visit www UconnectPhone com or call 1 877 855 8400 e Canadian Residents visit www UconnectPhone com or call 1 800 465 2001 English or 1 800 387 9983 French If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for detai
140. General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter N Go START STOP button for unauthorized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro vide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 additional minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm
141. IC high enough to block the location of the SABIC NOTE The area where the SABIC is located should remain e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim free from any obstructions but they will open during air bag deployment Continued 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their body outside of the window SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Occupants including children who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants especially chil dren should not lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back use the seat belts properly and use the appropri
142. INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 e 1 8 Mile e 1 4 Mile e Instantaneous G Force e Peak G Force To access press and release either the UP or DOWN arrow button until SRT appears in the EVIC then press and release the SELECT button Press the UP or DOWN button to cycle through the features Press the SELECT button to select a feature Press and hold the SELECT button to reset best time The following describes each feature and its operation Timers 0 60 mph 0 100 km h When selected this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph 0 to 100 km h within 10 seconds e The feature will ready when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will appear when conditions are met for the event to begin e The screen will revert back to Please come to a complete stop Not Ready if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph 100 km h in less then 10 seconds The time will continue to display until the SELECT button is pressed or the vehicles is brought to a stop Braking Distance When selected this screen displays the vehicle s braking distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was depressed This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 mph 48 km h Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se The word READY will display when conditions are met for the event to begin The dis
143. If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 573 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Ser vice Schedule I Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Rotate tires T Replace the engine air cleaner filter I Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if necessary 21 Inspect the rear axle fluid AQ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 11 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs Spark plug change interval is mileage based only Monthly intervals do not apply 1 Replace the air conditioning filter T Inspect
144. L M may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates For further information refer to the Uconnect Supple ment Manual HARMAN KARDON Logic7 HIGH PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon audio system with GreenEdge technology that offers superior sound quality higher Sound Pressure Levels SPL and reduced energy consumption The new system utilizes proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies deliver ing substantial increases in component and system effi ciency levels The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge high efficiency amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power supply and drives a 7 4 channel playback architecture The Harman Kardon audio system offers the ability to choose Logic 7 surround sound for any audio source The GreenEdge high efficiency speaker designs ensure the system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in dynamic sound quality The speakers are tuned for maximum efficiency and perfectly matched to the ampli fier output stage ensuring state of the art multi seat surround sound processing Logic7 multichannel surround sound technology deliv ers an immersive accurate sound stage to every seating position This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or dashboard AUX input and i
145. Lane Change and Turn Signals 220 Lane Change Assist ses e n mem 221 Lap Sho lder Belts i000 eere erm E s 50 Latches 2 7 xa denso debe Ah eae devs OR RI Fri 102 Lateh Plates agde bees miegas Peig 51 Lead Free Gasoline llli 469 Leaks El id s sies ier eR WET eee oS 102 Lite of TINS 5 ii aa cir oed en aor Hong e auta 456 Light Bulbs eser mem eme toe es 102 Lights ig sca sve aer Ede EG E RES S 102 AIDA oie sce mute 3B be atavana eso aan aces ea a Stated 68 Alarm 2 essa ieee ees ees wee Rack Ras 319 AMLOK a 4 onde PDAS BORE EEE EES 318 Automatic Headlights 0 216 Brake Assist Warning llle 434 Brake Warming a cioe cs xe E embeds 319 Bulb Replacement s zagora aika a aoa aid aa 556 Daytime Running 0 0 0 eee sees 218 Dimmer Switch Headlight 220 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 434 EXtFIOE x icc wanni esce icm Ros a Ema 102 FOS ase EPEacor ee Vea due S Ed eR Ee 219 Hazard Warning Flasher lisse 482 Headlights s em eres Ehre ees 215 Headlights On Reminder illus 219 Headlights On With Wipers liess 216 Headlight Switch 00 00005 215 High Beam 5 4 065095 Reed tomes een be 221 High Beam Indicator 0000 313 High Beam Low Beam Select 221 Illuminated Entry 0 00000000 21 Instrument Cluster 0 0 diiis kis 215 Intensity Control
146. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545 CAUTION When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If Front Power Distribution Center a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected E 072710829 j Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 1 Fuse Spare 2 40 Amp Green Radiator Fan 1 546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 3 50 Amp Red Power Steering 1 4 30 Amp Pink Starter 5 40 Amp Green Anti Lock Brakes 6 25 Amp Natural m Anti Lock Brakes 7 Fuse Spare 8 Fuse Spare 9 20 Amp Yellow All Wheel Drive Module If Equipped 10 10 Amp Red Security 11 20 Amp Yellow Horns 12 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch 13 Fuse Spare 14 Fuse Spare 15 25 Amp Natural Transmission 16 E Fuse Spare 18 50 Amp Red Radiator Fan 2 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
147. Manual Service llle 588 Master Cylinder Brakes 00 533 Memory Feature Memory Seat Ls 209 Memory Seat vae es Cae 9 e em Pee a 209 Memory Seats and Radio 0 209 Methanol 2 ee dtes US ae d e ie See E ad 470 Mir Irip Computer a4 xs aan Rs RR ta 335 Mittors i33 623033 9G RIS IG ROG opbhG CR 110 Automatic Dimming sessss 110 Electric Powered llle 113 Electric Remote 0 0 cee ee ees 113 Exterior Folding 22552 koh e ERR 112 Heated 6 29 Ei ex e REX RR Ox 114 O tslde eua dope a ac ROO UE CR EU 111 Rearview llle 110 ro Pr PEE 114 Mode Fuel Saver sd ba ae Y EE ES YS 334 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 461 Mopat Parts so eere eae deas 512 MTBE ETBE eee 470 Multi Function Control Lever sss 220 en INDEX 603 New Vehicle Break In Period 97 Occupant Restraints secre sos eol es can seres 46 Occupant Restraints Sedan 0 4 64 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 469 Odometer seraa rea pakra E RERE gea AEE eee 313 Oil Change Indicator llle sss 314 Oil Change Indicator Reset 0 0 314 Oil ENGIN eee seem e ee eye CAG eas 514 Capacity iua beer esee vq eee end de 560 Change Interval llle 333 Checking ss c 08s wits au ree ra eques Pals 514 Dipstick ua
148. Markings o cse d eser ERE RA SERE RE 436 TICS cca doa ca Cac aO RR GRECI DE SE KIE eS Se 102 Aging Lite Of Dres sse ss macias e eed 456 Ait PreSSUT6 cu aii cat aeii Ro dog ld SAE AEA 447 Chair eene dose aac aec d nog ud 458 Compact Sparte sia ea dt kg were Road deba 453 General Information l l leen 447 High Speed uie eco esee Sa cts Ced 450 Inflation Pressures leeren 448 Life of DES sesse ise RR Ee ERR d 456 Load Capacity i24 cand bin eR ngoni 442 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 461 Pressure Warning Light 5 314 Quality Grading 6 0 0 tenp aiana h 589 Radial zs rn r EREE ORERE ad hee s atl 450 Replacement 3 0 2056 e208 ke ra ce putes ko 457 Rotation 1 2 ge ex EUER gui e eee ae a 460 Safety iius es dac x aci d Ra ke is 436 SIZES uoc sospeso tee SS hee e endyn s d pu 437 SNOW Tires bu eg A SRERLRSFR SETS 452 SPINNING ces xen cacy we e CRI ae 455 Tread Wear Indicators lessen 455 Tire Safety Information sanad soneran i enke an 436 TOWING 00206 44 ceme x sameaa wey Ree e d 480 Behind a Motorhome llle 480 Recreational 42 2 942434 Rey bretir Eni 3 nd 480 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome 480 Tachos ase ku esp edo eS ew HAS dU bue E ud 417 Traction Control llle 427 Trailer TOWING se etu rb dde RC e ey ees 480 Transmission Automatic i2 km uice Rea ex eR RE 401 Fluid isa uk Le R P oe ar Reads 535 Maintenarice s n
149. NOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver door handle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked 021867956 Grab The Door Handle To Unlock NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitte
150. NSTRUMENT PANEL 369 e Music Info Cleanup This feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation To make your selection touch the Music Info Cleanup soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the back arrow soft key e Surround Sound If Equipped This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection touch the Surround Sound soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the back arrow soft key Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth soft key the fol lowing settings will be available Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth 9 system For further information refer to the Uconnect Supplement SiriusXM Setup After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft key the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the back arrow soft key e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscri
151. NT PANEL M NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The recirculation feature may be unavailable soft button greyed out The Recircu lation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Temperature Control ATC Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button 4 on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas senger temperature hard or soft control buttons 7 8 13 14 Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experi ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect System Settings in
152. NTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Ser vice Schedule I Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires T Inspect the rear axle fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a O O O C C Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 577 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 138 Months Maintenance Ser vice Schedule I Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 1 If you are u
153. OWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground ALL MODELS Flat Tow NONE IF Transmission is operable Wheel Lift Front Transmission in NEUTRAL e 30 mph 48 km h max speed e 15 mi 24 km max distance Rear OK Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD mm Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other or associated brackets State and local laws regarding equipment designed for this purpose following equip vehicles under tow must be observed ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is If th def mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to ee a aen wae gt d while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position 504 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sg If the Key Fob is unavailable or the vehicle s battery is discharged see Shift Lever Override in this section for un Continued instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for If the vehicle being towed requires steering the towing ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position CAUTION not in the OFF or ACC position e The manufacturer does not recommend towing this vehicle using a tow dolly Vehicle damage may Do not use sling type equipment when towing occur Dam
154. Or Audio Device 1 Press the SETTINGS hard key 2 Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key 3 Select the Phone or Audio Device 4 At the Options pop up screen touch the Delete De vice soft key 5 Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite 1 2 3 5 Press the SETTINGS hard key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the currently connected device At the Options pop up screen touch the Make Favor ite soft key you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If Equipped If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect amp Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website UconnectPhone com for supported phones To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick Reference section Automatic download and update of a phone book if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1
155. Phone Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under Low to medium blower setting Low to medium vehicle speed Low road noise e Smooth road surface Fully closed windows Dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect amp Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 e e You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number c
156. Phone or Audio Device than the currently connected device The options pop up will be displayed Push the Delete Device button on the touchscreen Push the X to exit out of the Settings screen Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite 1 2 Push the Settings button on the touchscreen Push the Phone Bluetooth button on the touch Screen Push the button located to the right of the device name The options pop up will be displayed 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Push the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list 6 Push the X to exit out of the Settings screen Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If Equipped If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect amp Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth amp Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website UconnectPhone com for supported phones Tocall a name from a downloaded mobile phone book follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick Reference section Automatic download and update of a phone book if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000
157. RK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 405 WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit so
158. RUA ao s 509 AirCleanef D2selkce IR een RE uas 516 Block Heater 23s tod epiti ni ie RESQUE 4 400 Break In Recommendations 97 Checking Oil Level 2 2 llle 514 Compartment 6 6 eee 509 Coolant Antifreeze 2 2 0 ee eee eee 527 COONS x sien Malta WES CHEERS oem Rer gus 526 Exhaust Gas Caution so sieisen iepa 98 Fails to Start eee 398 Flooded Starting less 398 Fuel Requirements 4 sine a deem Re 469 Jump Starting lt ecce ze cs eae ea ey dws 496 Oll ia als ahaa CE duree Beg ewig mld ae od 514 ee INDEX 597 Oil Change Interval im men 333 OU Piller Capt x xsara a e ahha Sey Saree es 515 OilSelection serere niee llle 514 Oil Synthetic iatis ts mabasi a cae wh ous 515 Overheating 3 esses e be BE RR d 482 DLAEUDS ss doa er decd dor Ro RI dea RR e cs 395 Temperature Gauge 6 6 0 eee eee 322 Engine Oil Viscosity 2 0 2 eee eee 515 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 71 Entry System Illuminated 0 21 Ethanol lt 4 2 0524 6 3249 eh 44 E dob Eas 470 Event Data Recorder 1 0 0 00 ce eee eee 74 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 0 0 0 000 rutta ta 98 Exhaust System 04 03 6540 ep ae ba ne 98 Exterior Folding Mirrors 00 112 Exterior Lighting lle 215 Exterior Lights J ss e Roten 102 Filler Location Fuel llle 317 Filters Air Cleaner leen 516 Air Conditioning secies e
159. S TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible
160. SC Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only 432 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE When the ESC is switched OFF a feature of the system remains active This feature controls wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with tire chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 6 approximate grade or greater hill Gear select
161. STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the e Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if in a location accessible to children and do not present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with belts Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN WARNING mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Automatic Transmission Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle ram e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a before shifting into any driving gear number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued 3906 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE onl
162. SYSTEM OBD II 510 ll EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS cpie a aiea e nn 510 W REPLACEMENT PARIS 3 2 28008 ERR Ren 512 B DEALER SERVICE 2e RR 9 512 E MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 513 H Engine Oil ere este eee E RR 514 Engine Oil Filter passasin st priii t aua 515 Engine Air Cleaner Filter soo ceace naa ns s 516 Maintenance Free Battery 516 Air Conditioner Maintenance 518 A C Air Filter 3 2 0444 ow RR 520 Body Lubrication 0000000 Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System 0 0000 cee Cooling System 0 2 000000000 O Brake System 0 0 533 Automatic Transmission 535 508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Axle ooi sek ee e e e 537 Appearance Care And Protection From COfTOSI D vcr uw RELATO ERR eee VERRE 538 M FUSES 99 vorm 9 ReMERE REOR ee 544 Front Power Distribution Center Fuses 544 Rear Power Distribution Center Fuses 549 WM VEHICLE STORAGE s esee 554 E REPLACEMENT BULBS 555 E BULB REPLACEMENT 556 Front Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp And Side Marker Lamp Models With Halogen Headlamps 556 Front Low Beam Headlamp And P
163. Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The bonn EE 99 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node KIN Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion Keyless Ignition Node KIN This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob also contains
164. Ss MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your autho
165. TE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation 1 Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Access Door 2 Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521 Filter Access Cover A C Air Filter 3 Remove the used filter 5 Close the filter access cover 4 Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the maintenance intervals vehicle text and arrows on the filter will indicate this 522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latchi
166. TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light e he light should come on and remain on for ry four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners Continued es THINGS
167. TPM Telltale Light 464 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Premium System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver module e Four TPM sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 8 The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In additi
168. Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 Ibs 68 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg and 1400 lbs 635 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg 650 lbs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being load
169. VEHICLE 201 Heated Seats If Equipped WARNING Continued Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion On some models the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated in a seat that has been overheated could cause using the Uconnect System serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat WARNING Front Heated Seat Operations Uconnect 8 4 8 4 e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin Nav because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect display tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 70 out 6 950 1600 Pri audio n Sy J OFF Nw RUF Player Controls Climate Nav Phone amp More Controls Driver j Heated Seat HI s Mesos Heated Screen e Wheel D or c D A e Y X ad N 3 P 0364013994 Controls Soft Key Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key ay once to select HI level heating Press the soft
170. WARNING Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electri cal spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury Only use the specific ground point do not use any other exposed metal parts Disconnecting The Jumper Cables T Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster gable rom ihe positiye Del post or the Boaster battery battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then 4 start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 6 Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer 500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE CAUTION Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough without engine operation the vehicle s ba
171. a Se Ma uses em ades 288 Troubleshooting Tips llle 289 General Information 0 290 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 291 Opening Sunroof Express 292 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 292 Closing Sunroof Express 292 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 292 Pinch Protect Feature 293 Venting Sunroof Express 293 Sunshade Operation 00 293 Wind Buffeting 0 0 0 00a ee 293 Sunroof Maintenance 00 294 Ignition Off Operation 0 0 294 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 ll ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS 294 Console Features llle 303 BN CUPHOLDERS eu 54034 09549 ap eder ees 298 Do r BIOIS o acce ice o eoo ORE VS 304 Front Seat Cupholders 298 Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped with 60 40 Rear Seat Cupholders sse 301 Split Folding Rear Seat 0 0 305 B STORAGE eccess riki edge Perder ae 302 E E ONS anes acer ated a06 3 Glove Compartment cese 302 Rear Window Defroster nanana naaa 306 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at th
172. a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations For Jump Start The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the engine compartment for jump starting NOTE The remote battery posts are viewed by standing on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497 WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or Remote Battery Post Locations s
173. a smaller load index or If driving conditions require tire chains for your vehicle capacity other than what was originally equipped use only chains that meet SAE type Class S specifica on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load tions In addition only install tire chains on 245 45ZR20 index could result in tire overloading and failure size tires Contact you local authorized dealership or tire You could lose control and have a collision dealer for these size tires CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 459 CAUTION CAUTION Continued To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave following precautions ment fe Because of restricted chain clearance between tires e Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Broken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use e Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle
174. acle Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status N Omi 10F Park Assist System OFF 032763982 Park Assist System Off The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing 032769130 three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous Park Assist Ready Park Assist j 032763983 Slow Tone UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 Park Assist 032763984 Fast Tone 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert opera F tion when the system is detecting an obstacle Omi Park Assist MEL 032763987 Continuous Tone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance Greater than 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Ch
175. age to the fascia will occur e When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with attach to the front or rear suspension components all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed Damage to your vehicle may result from improper If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable this vehicle may be towed with rear wheels on the ground under the following conditions towing e Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result e The transmission must be in NEUTRAL The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN o T The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h position not in the OFF or ACC position The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km Continued EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 505 If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift and the transmission in NEUTRAL CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6 4L 392 HEMI 509 ll ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
176. ags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the collisions This does not mean something is wrong with skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye the air bag system irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause structions for cleaning abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium Pu They are not caused by contact with chemicals ey are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly withina Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor protect you in another collision Have the air bags immediately seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may
177. ailure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 072741464 Rear Power Distribution Center 550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 2 60 Amp Yellow Front PDC Feed 1 3 Fuse Spare 4 60 Amp Yellow Front PDC Feed 2 5 30 Amp Pink Sunroof 6 40 Amp Green Exterior Lighting 1 7 40 Amp Green Exterior Lighting 2 8 30 Amp Pink Interior Lighting Washer Pump 9 30 Amp Pink Power Locks 10 30 Amp Pink Driver Door 11 30 Amp Pink EE Passenger Door 12 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighters Instrument Panel amp Power Outlet Con sole Rear 15 40 Amp Green HVAC Blower 16 Fuse Spare 17 Fuse Spare ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 18 20 Amp Yellow Active Dampening Module 19 Fuse Spare 20 Fuse Spare 21 Fuse Spare 22 Fuse Spare 23 10 Amp Red Fuel Door Diagnostic Port 24 15 Amp Blue Radio Screen 25 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor 26 Fuse Spare 27 25 Amp Natu
178. airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instruc tions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389 Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS s7 and turn on A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle N set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows X Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level a with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel 7 and turn on AVC If it s cloudy or 1 dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature X3 oc pale control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Mix or Defrost Sg HUMID CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and bg 64 Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear 568 COLD DRY Set the Mo
179. all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors On 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all the doors or use the RKE transmitter e Memory Linked To FOB Touch the Memory Linked to FOB soft key to change this display This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle driver 1 and driver 2 last mode settings and presets To make your selection touch the Memory Linked to FOB soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information
180. alling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone e Redial Dial by touching in the number ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Voice Commands Dial by Saying a Number Call by Saying a Phonebook Name Redial or Call Back e Mobile Phonebook Recent Call Log NOTE All of the above operations except Redial can be done with one call or less active Dial By Saying A Number 1 Press the w button to begin 2 After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial 248 555 1212 3 The Uconnect Phone will dial 248 555 1212 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name 1 Push the Phone w button on your steering wheel to begin 2 After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call John Doe Mobile 3 The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe Call Controls The touchscreen allows you to control the following call features e Answer e End e Ignore e Hold unhold e Mute unmute Transfer the call to from the phone 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e Swap two active calls Join two active calls together Touch Tone Number Entry 1
181. an outboard position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passen ger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child re straint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be re moved Yes Center position only may be re moved 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback below the anchorage sym bols on the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion LATCH Anchorages 4 J Locating The LATCH Anchorages 4 In addition there are tether strap anchorages Eh behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 Tether Strap Anchorages LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection t
182. and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the available information displays then press SELECT to display any one of the following choices e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e AWD Status If Equipped Displays a vehicle ICON with four wheels highlighted and AWD if All Wheel Drive is active Displays a vehicle ICON with two wheels highlighted and RWD if All Wheel Drive is inactive Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans Temperature Displays the actual transmission temperature e Engine Hours Displays the number of hours of engine operation Tire Pressure Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Messages Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons This feature shows the number of stored warning mes sages in the place holder Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to see what the stored messages are Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Menu Turn Menu OFF Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button Press ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display Pressing any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the menu back Uconnect amp SETTINGS The Uconnect system uses a combination of soft an
183. and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this mes sage type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start e Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Ex amples of this message type are Memory System Un available Not in Park and Automatic High Beams On The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left EVIC White Telltale Lights This area will show reconf
184. anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Reset Auto Up Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window may need to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Make sure the door is fully closed 2 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 3 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in the DOWN position To enable the window controls press and release the window lockout button again setting it in the UP position Window Lockout Switch 021935321 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the
185. any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration me For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511 Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To che
186. ap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners abrasives or polishing compounds They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541 CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue equivalent is recommended Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If protectant OQ Siati Pepel TOURS Equipped Interior Care Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man Use MOPAR Total Clean to
187. ark Turn Lamp Models With High Intensity Discharge Headlamps BID c esete ka Reseed ba dared des ona 557 Backup Lamps 000200000 cee 558 License L mp asas Reka issu diia 559 B FLUID CAPACITIES is 2ks2 icade ines ds 560 ll FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS sues sac diggs a Mth aged Gow tes ps 561 Engine 2 4 7 209s ie PER EDR OER ESSE 561 Chassis vuoi ea ca te cece aad cee eee 562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6 4L 392 HEMI s 9 0 wise 1 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Power Distribution Center Fuses 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir 5 Engine Coolant Reservoir 510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If
188. art When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BENE e Auto On Driver Heated Ventilated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C When tempera tures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol lowing settings will be available Easy Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconne
189. ash Headlights With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the back arrow soft key Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Lock When this feature is selected all doors will lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the arrow back soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Unlock On Exit Touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key to change this display When this feature is selected all doors will E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key and select ON or OFE Then touch the arrow back soft key e Flash Lights With Lock Touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the front and
190. ate Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 575 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Ser vice Schedule I Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever comes first OCO CO C O C O Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A l N T E N A N e I S e H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N ie E S ie H E B U L E S 8 576 MAI
191. ate sized child restraint infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection and works together with the Driver Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger and position the front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags SAB Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on several factors including the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions dependi
192. ave an AUTO down feature Press the window switch to the second 1 WARNING detent release and the window will go down automati Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do cally not let children play with power windows Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop Continued 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly AUTO Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no
193. be 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription SRT Performance Features To access the SRT Performance Features touch the SRT amp More soft key then touch the SRT Performance soft key Press the UP or DOWN soft key to cycle through the features Press the feature soft key to select that feature WARNING Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor mance Features is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be done on any public roadways It is recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which can jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The Performance Features include the following e Timers Engine Values Digital Gauge Displays E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371 e 0 60 mph 0 100 km h This system reduces body roll and pitch in many e Braking Distance E qun including cornering acceleration e 1 8 Mile 200 meter Tim
194. buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice within five seconds Trunk Release Button With the ignition in the ON RUN position the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 With the ignition in the OFF position or the key removed Trunk Emergency Release from the ignition switch the Trunk Open symbol will A i a Trunk Internal Emergency Release display until the trunk is closed a ii AU cete ied lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism In the Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the 2e Before Starting Your Vehicle for more information on trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow in the trunk operation with the Pa
195. button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering Security System Manual Override The Ve
196. cation accessible to children Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could 034141878 also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are also properly secured Urz am a Power Sunroof Switch Continued 292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second The sunroof and sunshade will open automati cally from any position The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the sw
197. ce with the compass sensor and it may give false readings NUNT 6 7 8 9 Compass Variance Map 040506040 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 e Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by touching the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as build ings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Audio e Equalizer Touch the Equalizer soft key to change this display When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the back m arrow soft key NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting e BalancelFade Touch the Balance Fade soft key to change this dis play When in
198. ch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is pro grammed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver
199. ck if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine NOTE If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 2 As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 3 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement 512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your
200. clean fabric upholstery and 7 ner carpeting e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery ith a cl l ESCUELAS MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery 542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPARQ Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm CAUTION Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol based and or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats as damage to the seat may result Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break age than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures
201. ct Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice a command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you To mute the Uconnect amp Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa push the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect amp
202. ct phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367 Delay status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Compass Settings After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptop Computers and Radar Detectors This is where the com pass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor
203. ctive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 20 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 21 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operat ing satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads 260 pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the 260 and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service WARNING A hot engine cooling
204. d and power dren should be warned not to touch the parking outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the brake brake pedal or the shift lever ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either e Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or front door will cancel this feature The time for this in a location accessible to children and do not feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN information mode A child could operate power windows other RNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Continued 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked Th
205. d hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features Hard Keys Hard Keys are located on the left and right side of the Uconnect 4 3 screen In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings i e 30 60 90 press the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Soft Keys Soft Keys are accessible on the Uconnect touchscreen Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 4 3 Settings In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 Heated Seats Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup through hard keys and soft keys NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time Press the Settings hard key to access the Settings screen use the Page Up Down soft keys to scroll through the following settings Touch the desired setting soft key to change the setting using the description shown on the following pages for each setting 044336083 1 Uconnect 4 3 Settings Hard Key 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M5 Settings
206. d in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert amp can be enabled or disabled by your autho rized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it
207. d out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly a P gt s DET 032400170 Offset Driving Condition Example Turns And Bends In turns or bends ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too late or too early This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly Give extra attention in curves and be ready to apply the brakes if necessary Be sure to select an appropriate speed while driving in curves 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 032400171 Turn Or Bend Example ACC may occasionally provide braking and or a driver alert that you consider unnecessary This may be the system s response to signs guardrails and other station ary objects in a curve This may also occur at the base of steep hills This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service Using ACC On Hills When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor mance may be limited 032400172 ACC Hill Example es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 Lane Changing ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC system to take actio
208. d phones you will see lt Empty gt as the first device name b Press the MORE hard key then press the Phone soft key and you will go to the Uconnect Phone main screen Press the Settings soft key If there are no phones currently paired a pop up will appear If you select Yes you will go the Paired Phones screen if you select No you will return to the Uconnect Phone main menu At the Paired Phones screen press the Add Device soft key and a pop up with instructions will appear Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone select the Uconnect device and enter the PIN When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range zx o 5 D UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled Audio Device When prompted on the device select the Uconnect device and enter the PIN Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device t
209. d vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately 526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam Cooling System age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition WARNING when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis motion connect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera vehicle ture controlled and can start at any time the igni Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires Hon swath is by re Os Posner disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions You or others can be badly burned by hot
210. d be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If a child from 2 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t
211. d pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert amp BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat if equippe
212. de control to Floor If its sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 7 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Mix or Defrost cul as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort GERD STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS Bl STARTING PROCEDURES 395 Key Ignition Park Interlock 402 Automatic Transmission 395 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 403 Keyless Enter N Go 0000 396 Five Speed Automatic Transmission Normal Starting 0 000000 396 B AUTOSTICK 0 eee Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or 229 ku cute derisum oo beu a Be 398 Console Mounted Shifter 410 If Engine Fails To Start 398 I SPORT MODE kem RE md 413 O After Starting sese e e 400 IM LAUNCH MODE IF EQUIPPED 415 E ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED 400 Bl DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES 417 Bl AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 401 Acceleration cec Rene Rond 417 392 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Traction ese saae 694 49 em eee eR eae 417 E DRIVING THROUGH WATER 418 Flowing Rising Water llle 418 Shallow Standing Wa
213. deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING Continued In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the WARNING Continued Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and or Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed instrument panel e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even Continued on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Research has shown that seat belts save
214. display General Overview Hard Keys Hard keys are located on the left and right side of the Uconnect 4 3 screen in the center of the instrument panel There are also hard keys located below the Uconnect touchscreen Uconnect 4 3 Hard Key 044336084 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379 Soft Keys Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect system screen 0456015417 Manual Climate Controls Hard Keys MTC System Driver Shown 0456006085 Uconnect 4 3 Manual Temperature Controls Soft Keys 380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL gt Uconnect 8 4 Automatic Temperature Controls Soft Keys Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard Keys And Soft Keys 1 MAX AIC Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when MAX A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the MAX A C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A C indicator will turn off 2 AIC Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the A C operation to switch into manual mode and the A C indicator will turn off 3 Recirculation Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 4 AUTO Operation Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount Perform
215. drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer EEEEEE X THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your 0202003287 Emergency Key Removal 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade other hand SE screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es new battery with your fingers Skin oils may ca
216. e arrow back soft key As you continue the information will display in the selected units of measure Voice Response Touch the Voice Response soft key to change the Voice Response Length settings To change the Voice Response Length press and release the Brief or Long soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Touchscreen Beep Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft key to turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touchscreen button soft key is pressed To change the Touchscreen Beep setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key then touch the arrow back soft key e Fuel Saver Display Touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key to turn the ECO message located in the instrument cluster display on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Dis play soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Clock e Set Time Touch the Set Time soft key to change this display When in this display you may select the time display settings To make your selection touch the Set Time soft key adjust the hours and minutes using the up and 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M down soft keys select AM or PM select 12 hr or 24 hr Then touch the back arrow soft key when all selections are complete e Show Time Status Touch the Show Time Status soft key to change this display When in this display you may turn on or shut off the dig
217. e if you previously created a Phone book entry and or Last Name as Voice Password then if you press the EVR button and say Send Voicemail Password the Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phone book entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature e Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored when dialing a numbered sequence Barge In Overriding Prompts The VR button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking There are two numbers with the name John Say the full name you could push the EVR button and say John Smith to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length 1 Press the MORE hard key then touch the Settings soft key Touch the Di
218. e tire is repaired or replaced Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M E After Driving Pull over to a safe location Refer to Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT before continuing 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Air Mode position Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 black in color and screw the fitting at the end of hose 7 onto the valve stem Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge 3 If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 Bar or higher 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn on TIREFIT and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver side door opening NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing 2 Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet 3 Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle 4 Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest oppo
219. e Voice Command system as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Command system to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level The Uconnect Voice Command system allows you to control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player SD Card USB iPod and SiriusXM Travel Link 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your at tention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Uconnect Voice Command AVR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command If no command is spoken the system will say one of two responses e didn t understand I didn t get that etc If a command is not spoken a second time the system will respond with an error and give some direction as what can be said based on the context you are in After three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR session will end Pressing the Uconnect Voice Command vk button while the system is speaking is known as barging in ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can say a command This will become helpful once you
220. e When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes e When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed The Cruise Control system has two control modes Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles Normal fixed speed cruise control mode is for cruis ing at a constant preset speed For additional informa tion refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 NOTE The system will not react to preceding vehicles Always be aware of the mode selected You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control ve buttons The two control modes function differently Always confirm which mode is selected GA rud Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation lu CANCEL SET The speed control buttons located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the ACC system 032368174 Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons 1 DISTANCE SETTING 4 CANCEL 2 RES 5 ON OFF 3 SET 6 MODE 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Any chassis suspension modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dis plays Adapt
221. e doors Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver s view of the ground rearward of the front doors The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir rors in Reverse position es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 NOTE The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver s door trim panel 030434975 Power Mirror Control The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press either the L left or R right button to select the mirror that you want to adjust 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE A light in the select button will illuminate indi cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirr
222. e eed RR es 514 Filler egt uc AS Ra GRAS Ha dex Eg Rune s 515 Materials Added to 2 2 cee eee 515 Recommendation lees 514 Synth lie uses Hangs cine ad eoe eee aded 515 VISCOSITY iue sia ana es dace e i tein dex rede eg 515 Oil Filter Selection llle 515 Onboard Diagnostic System llus 510 Operating Precautions s es nia lees 510 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors uaaa aaan 111 Overdrive s s csse euge hren eb a Rep ed d 410 Overdrive OFF Switch llle 410 Overheating Engine m ssc sis oss te 322 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 Paint Cate ases ke ra res Panic Alarm isis ele ir eet Re ooh Parking Drake dys sepe Saas Pages Y edd ParkSense System Rear llle Passing Light es reds be Rats Pedals Adjustable 1 2 0 0 0 00000 Pet Gad a d ek kx SR Se dee ee eS Pets Iransportng so eatem ce ea ee Phone Paiting s ee ed ey ve boda 4 eme Placard Tire and Loading Information 604 INDEX ae Power Deck Lid Release 0 0 00 44 Distribution Center Fuses 549 Doopt LOCKS ERR th dee SRE OE eS ee 32 Mirrors cabe em rh we ERR Ua Re de 113 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 294 S dlS 4 52a pec E aer PRO Rr e PR PEE 197 OLeerinp a oid ouem Soh eee teh diee fad 420 DUNTOOR x eis ae a UAR ed ees a d Tn ea a 291 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 2
223. e if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center EE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 569 GY A 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 42 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service N Months Maintenance Service Schedule T Schedule Q1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E T Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires N filter 11 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air A J Rotate tires cleaner filter and replace if necessary N 1 Replace the air conditioning filter C T Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary E Q1 Inspect the CV joints S T Inspect the exhaust system C J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all H parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary E 11 Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police B taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date 8 Re
224. e is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control all the door windows Power Window Switches ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 There are single window controls on each passenger door WARNING Continued trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N is in the ACC or ON RUN position Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode Occupants f particularly unattended children can become en NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect the trapped by the windows while operating the power power window switches will remain active for up to 10 window switches Such entrapment may result in minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position serious injury or death Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings in AUTO Down Feature Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches h
225. e is parked ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator light in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF Electronic Speed Control Buttons button a second time The Cruise Indicator light will turn 1 ON OFF 3 SET off The system should be turned off when not in use 2 RES 4 CANCEL 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has
226. e it NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada s website for additional infor mation e http www tc gc ca eng roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle 78 THING
227. e rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 021835328 i Child Protection Door Lock Locati 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door Mod cM LM EE 021835329 Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock knob up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons NOTE e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time 36 THINGS TO K
228. e reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 L of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into 4 the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system 524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system WARNING or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and haust system and adjacent body areas for broken
229. e safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold driving conditions For more information contact a au thorized dealer Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall 452 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Use summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry sur
230. e speed of U S mph or Metric km h units U S Speed mph e Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh Pressing the RES button once will result in a 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 2 km h e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Decrease Speed When the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set you can decrease speed by pushing the SET button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U S mph or Metric km h units U S Speed mph Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh Pressing the SET button once will result in a 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 2 km h e If
231. e system uses a Key Fob with a factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter a Keyless Ignition Node KIN and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine After placing the ignition to the ON RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electron ics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 CAUTION Do not make modifications or alterations to the immobilizer system Modifications or alterations to the immobilization system may result in a loss of security protection The Se
232. e time that it takes ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition is cycled off Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air B
233. e turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the back arrow soft key e Auto High Beams SmartBeams Touch the Auto High Beams soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the back arrow soft key Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights If Available Touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the back arrow soft key e Steering Directed Lights If Equipped Touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel To make your selection touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key and select ON or OFE Then touch the back arrow soft key e Flash Lights With Lock Touch the Fl
234. e was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information HEEE X UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch 031464416 Fog Light Switch O To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam MUST mpm WIPER Qo high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Multifunction Lever headlights or parking lights on However selecting the GR 1 m EC 11 The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031563089 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction
235. e wind shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 030407085 This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you This feature will be defaulted on and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse mmEEEmmm UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING 030436523 Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side Automatic Dimming Mirror convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your CAUTION passenger side con
236. eat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 8 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether seating position has a top tether anchorage connect Anchorage the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to EE 1 Look behind the seating position where you attach a tether anchor Hi plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position move the child restraint to another position in the Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the vehicle if one is available belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary 9 Test that the child restraint is instal
237. ecrus iia diri pieu tii 205 EE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Folding Rear Seat 3 mes 207 Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control E DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED 209 It Equipped iere re Er tients 217 Programming The Memory Feature 210 Headlight Time Delay 218 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Io MM zd CAM DM Entry Transmitter To Memory 211 Memory Position Recall ls 212 Eg ON NEE quedo d sodes Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory ee a dps ue seat Only iua ees aes og dere RR Ra qs 213 Multifunction Lever llle 220 ll TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 214 T r Signals va scene exa eX EY Ra 220 B LIGEIIS sudes kde reesei Rex Eae rare x 215 Lane Change Assist cu cias cae ncaa ene 221 Headlight Switch 00040 215 High Low Beam Switch 221 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 216 Flash To Pass 0 0 00 00000000 221 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Front Map Reading Lights 222 Automatic Headlights Only sees ey ea ee 216 Courtesy Lights sce Rees 223 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Ambient Lights iu 25 44 exa xy aes 223 Interior Lights ay sraao tant
238. ed on the back of battery power available at all times Items plugged into the center console for rear passengers This power outlet this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent the has power available only when the ignition is placed in engine from starting the ACC or RUN position Center Console Power Outlet Rear Center Console Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 072736519 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel amp Power Outlet Console Rear 2 38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest 298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION Continued Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting CUPHOLDERS e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers Front Seat Cupholders vacuum cleaners lights etc wil
239. ed on the touchscreen Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs e Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 e Sending a text message via the touchscreen e Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touchscreen Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly NOTE Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone For Uconnect customer support e U S residents visit www UconnectPhone com or call 1 877 855 8400 e Canadian Residents visit www UconnectPhone com or call 1 800 465 2001 English or 1 800 387 9983 French Uconnect amp Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your at tention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death T
240. ed on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 eee STARTING AND OPERATING 445 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle The follow ing table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and num ber and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 446 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Combined weight of AVAILABLE occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and TOTAR FRONT REAR from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Occupant 1 200 Ibs Weight 865 Ibs af 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 tbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs minus 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Is TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs minus 400 Ibs 465 Ibs B11a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 447 WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions U
241. ehicle acceleration in a straight line Launch Control is a form of traction control that manages tire slip while launching the vehicle This feature is intended for use during race events on a closed course where consistent quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired The system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver experience or familiarity with the race track Use of this feature in low traction cold wet gravel etc conditions may results in excess wheel slip outside this systems control resulting in an aborted launch Preconditions e Launch control should not be used on public roads Always check track conditions and the surrounding area e Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles of vehicle life e Launch Control should only be used when the engine and transmission are at operating temperature e Launch Control is intended to be used on dry paved road surfaces only Use on slippery or loose surfaces may cause damage to vehicle components Launch Control is only available when the following procedure is followed 1 Press the ESC OFF button to put the vehicle into ESC Partial mode The ESC OFF lamp will illumi nate in the cluster 2 Press the ESC OFF button a second time to put the vehicle into Launch Control The ESC OFF lamp will remain lit and the cluster display will read Launch Control Enabled 416 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 3 4 5 Make sure the
242. eiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not Continued 290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde use a garage door opener without these safety fea sired operation tures Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or NOTE assistance e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compli This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry ance could void the user s authority to operate the Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following device two conditions General Information The term IC before the certification registration num 1 This device may not cause harmful interference ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors r tle overhead console e Never leave children unattended in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a lo
243. elease button Do not pry on the door 476 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place fuel containers on the Fuel Funnel ground while filling CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling STARTING AND OPERATING 477 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel filler door emergency release 1 Open the trunk 2 Remove the access cover located on the left side inner trim panel Access Cover 3 Pull the release cable 478 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Release Cable VEHICLE LOADING e The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the drivers side B Pillar or the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information Name of manufacturer Month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross
244. elect only Panel Bi Level or Floor modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385 NOTE For Manual Climate Controls if the system is in Mix Floor or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed f your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radiator and through the condenser MAX A C MAX A C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor mance Press and release to toggle between MAX A C and the prior settings The soft key illuminates when MAX A C is ON In MAX A C the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A C operation to switch to the selected setting and MAX A C to exit Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or co high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle 386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUME
245. emote start or exits remote start prema turely Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Remote Start Aborted Trunk Ajar Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid uninten
246. en selected this screen displays the following values e Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the gauge e Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure e Battery Voltage Shows the actual battery voltage Gauges 2 When selected this screen displays the following values e Coolant Temperature Shows the actual coolant temperature within the range of the gauge ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373 Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the gauge Transmission Temperature Shows the actual transmission temperature within the range of the gauge e Intake Air Temperature Shows the actual intake air temperature within the range of the gauge Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure e Battery Voltage Shows the actual battery voltage Engine When selected this screen displays miles per hour mph horsepower hp torque ft lb oil pressure psi and gear selector values Handling When selected this screen displays peak g force steering EE and yaw angles Options When selected this screen allows you to choose a stan dard or customize display for your SRT home page iPod USB MP3 CONTROL This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANE
247. engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527 Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 only ac cording to Chrysler Service Manual procedure or by an authorized dealer Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill
248. entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Managing Your Favorite Phonebook There are three ways you can add an entry to your Favorite Phonebook 1 During an active call of a number to make a favorite touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone main screen 2 After loading the mobile phonebook select phone book from the Phone main screen then select the appropriate number Touch the next to the selected number to display the options pop up In the pop up select Add to Favorites 68 us FM917 10 10 NW 54 out Ww 72 Phonebook gt Mobile gt amp Ana Conda Add to Favorites f 248 123 4567 f 248 456 7891 vin 248 577 6215 o d sar Nav Phone 0305016955 Phonebook Favorites NOTE If the Favorites list is full you will be asked to remove an existing favorite
249. er locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open and the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Please see your authorized dealer for service Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The vehicle was in motion then speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h and the transmission shift lever is placed in PARK 3 The driver door is opened 4 The doors were not previously unlocked Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats th
250. er seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539 Washing e e e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPARO Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do no
251. er to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e ParkSense If Equipped The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h It will provide an alert audible and or visual to indicate the proximity to other objects The system can be enabled with Sound Only or Sound and Display To change the ParkSense status touch and release the Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to ParkSense in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and oper ating information e ParkSense Chime Volume The ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected from the EVIC or Uconnect System if equipped The chime volume settings include LOW MEDIUM and HIGH The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM To make your selection touch the ParkSense Chime Volume soft key until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu ParkSense will retain its last known configura tion state through ignition cycles 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped When this feature is selected the outside sideview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN positi
252. erature control Push the button for warmer temperature set tings 382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 8 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 9 SYNC Press the Sync soft key to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature 10 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation The speeds can be selected using either hard keys or soft keys as follows Hard Key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise Soft Key Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 11 Modes The airf
253. ergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will in struct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area e The Uconnect amp Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect Phone 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Roadside Assistance Towing Assistance If you need roadside towing assistance e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Roadside Assistance or say Towing Assis tance NOTE The roadside towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 800 363 4869 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for out side Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour R
254. ers e 1 4 Mile 400 meter 0 60 mph 0 100 km h 1 8 Mile 200 meter 1 4 Mile e Instantaneous G Force 400 meter e Peak G Force When selected this screen displays the time it takes for ital d the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph 0 to 100 km h 1 8 Digital Speedometer mile 200 meter or 1 4 mile 400 meter The following describes each feature and its operation The feature will be ready when the vehicle speed is Home at 0 mph 0 km h When selected this screen allows you to choose Sport e Soft keys allow access to the current best and last Track mode times recorded This mode provides performance based suspension tuning with improved handling and acceleration through an electronic controlled dampening system 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Braking Distance When selected this screen displays the vehicle s braking distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was depressed e This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 mph 48 km h e The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com plete stop G Force When selected this screen displays all four G Force values two lateral and two longitudinal as well as steering angle When a force greater than zero is measured the display will update the value as it climbs As the G Force falls the peak forces will continue to display Gauges 1 Wh
255. evel of fuel in the fuel tank when A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced ihe ignition switch is in the ON RUN position above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you 12 Air Bag Warning Light drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others e This light will turn on for four to eight seconds ry as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints Indicates vehicle speed in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for 10 Fuel Door Reminder further information 9 Speedometer The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle lt 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 13 Sport Shifting This light will illuminate when Track mode is selected When Track Mode is selected the EVIC will display Track Mode Activated Sus pension and Transmission In addition to SPORT suspension Track mode also affects transmission shifting in either Auto or Manual mode Refer to AutoStick in Starting And Operating for further information The transmission has a sp
256. faces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles 80 km at 50 mph 80 km h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of or below 14 psi 96 kPa Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi ately A Run Flat tire is not repairable It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor mation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 453 Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a spare tire please refer to TIREFIT KIT in What To Do In Emergencies for further information CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel
257. fice light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289 The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e e Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ter Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transc
258. for the driver To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the adjust ment button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Adjustment Button NOTE The outboard head restraints are not adjustable Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area To fold the rear seatback pull on the loops located on the upper seatback 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx NOTE These loops can be tucked away when not in use Folded Rear Seatback 030936862 When the seatback is folded to the upright position make Rear Seatback Loop sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the After releasing the seatback it can be folded forward seatback above the seat strap ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper sta bility for child seats and or passengers An improp erly latched seat could cause serious injury e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper
259. g Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description un der Occupant Restraints The cinching latch plate is 0226023829 designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint s belt path Please see the following table s and the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a for ward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passen ger seat Yes Contact between the front passen ger seat
260. gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 471 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non Flex Fuel Vehicles FFV are compatible with gaso line containing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms Operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on Poor engine performance Poor cold start and cold drivability ncreased risk for fue
261. gnition Off time is programmable using the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are three 12 Volt 13 Amps electrical power outlets on this vehicle The power outlets are protected by a fuse Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power outlets for use to ensure proper operation NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295 CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watts 13 Amps power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Front Power Outlet The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only WARNING when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result 296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The center console outlet is powered directly from the There is also a 12 Volt power outlet locat
262. gram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287 Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency
263. gress one active and one on hold push the Join Calls button on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the End soft key or the button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automati cally This is cell phone dependent Redial 1 Touch the Redial soft key or press the w button and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial 2 The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the em
264. haded grey Power Seats If Equipped SEATS On models equipped with power seats the switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the driver s seat up or down forward or rearward or to recline the seatback Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The passenger s seat will move up or down forward or rearward Power Seat Switches 1 Seat Control 2 Seatback Control Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 Reclining The Seatback WARNING Continued The angle of the seatback can be adju
265. has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485 TIREFIT KIT IF EQUIPPED Small punctures up to 4 6 mm in the tire tread can be sealed with TIREFIT Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately 4 F 20 C This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a maximum speed of 55 mph 90 km h TIREFIT Storage The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk 486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TIREFIT Location TIREFIT Components 1 Sealant Bottle 2 Deflation Button 3 Pressure Gauge 4 Power Button 5 Mode Select Knob 6 Sealant Hose Clear 7 Air Pump Hose Black 8 Power Plug located on bottom side of TIREFIT Kit Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode Selecting Air Mode g Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to A this position for air pump operation only Use the Black Air Pump Hose 7 when selecting this mode Selecting Sealant Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to this position to inject the TIRE v FIT Sealant and to inflate the tire Use the Sealant Hose clear hose 6 when selecting this mode WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487 Using T
266. he Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Headlights With Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Headlight Illumination On Approach This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for fu
267. he Power Button Push and release the Power Button 4 once to C turn On the TIREFIT kit Push and release the Power Button 4 again to turn Off the TIREFIT kit Using The Deflation Button Press the Deflation Button 2 to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated TIREFIT Usage Precautions e Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label to assure optimum operation of the system Refer to Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT section F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement 0604018634 TIREFIT Expiration Date Location e The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 are a one tire application use and need to be replaced after each use Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer e When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material from 488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded For optimum performance make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TIREFIT kit You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment on the bottom of the air pump for inflating sport balls rafts or
268. he TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 463 CAUTION NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace norma
269. he Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect amp Phone Button The Uconnect Phone w Button is used to enter the phone mode and make calls show recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command Sve Button is 4 VR only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call The Sve button is also used to access the Voice Com mands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped Please see the Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how to use the Sve butt
270. he Uconnect Phone from idle simply push the w button on your steering wheel and say a com mand or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a push of the w button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 You can also push the or Eve button on your steering wheel when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone NOTE You must have Bluetooth enabled on your mobile phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in PARK To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing 1 Press the Phone soft key on the screen to begin 2 If there is no phone currently connected with the system a pop up will appear S FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out W 72 No phone connected Would you like to pair a phone 9 2 Radio Player 0305016946 Mobile Phone Pairing 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Select Yes to begin the pairing process Then search CCP FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 on ly 72 for available devices on your Blueto
271. he highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device 1 Press the PLAYER hard key to begin NOTE If No is selected device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority Bp TONGUE SOUR AOE NG You can also use the following VR command to bring up 3 Change the Source to Bluetooth a list of paired audio devices 4 Touch the Add Device soft key e Show Paired Audio Devices 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the high est priority paired phone and or Audio Device within range If you need to choose a particular Phone or Audio Device follow these steps 1 Press the SETTINGS hard key 2 Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key 3 Touch to select the particular Phone or the Phone Audio soft key and then an Audio Device 4 At the Options pop up screen touch the Connect Device soft key 5 Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device 1 Press the SETTINGS hard key 2 Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key 3 Select the Phone or Audio Device 4 At the Options pop up screen touch the Disconnect Device soft key 5 Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Deleting A Phone
272. hen activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on volume will be reduced EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 NOTE e Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio volume is reduced e If the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used Uconnect Phone 4 3 Uconnect 4 3 Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone Uconnect Phone supports the following features Voice Activated Features e Hands
273. hicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position from the OFF position NOTE The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters Key Fob With RKE Transmitter To Unlock T
274. hicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately e ry e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first cycled to the ON RUN e The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpo
275. his light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected Lal ee The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is cycled ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was cycled off previously STARTING AND OPERATING 435 e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation b OFF The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is partially off or full off Synchronizing ESC If the power supply is interrupted battery disconnected or discharged
276. his section only the compound command form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound command form voice command Search for John Smith or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect amp Phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR engine Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can
277. ich you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N Cc I S e H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech YOUR VEHICLE se ironiak NE a 583 Impaired TDD TTY ss rreri r ua teener 585 Prepare For The Appointment 583 Service Contract 0 000 000 eee 585 Prepare A List sse cope ewe G eae 583 MH WARRANTY INFORMATION 586 Be Reasonable With Requests 583 MB MOPAR PARTS 00004 587 B IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 583 W REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 587 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 584 In The 50 United States And Washington D C llle 587 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 584 In Mexico Contact llle 585 In Canada e uice deed slept erpe E Suriri ll PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 582 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades cac ti ara oiea ka aooe ae 589 TIRE QUALITY GRADES
278. icle for further informa tion Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high 516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPARQ engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air inducti
279. igurable white caution tell tales These telltales include e Shift Lever Status The shift lever status P R N D 5 4 3 2 1 are displayed indicating the shift lever position Telltales 5 4 3 2 1 indicate the Electronic Range Select ERS feature has been engaged and the gear selected is displayed For further information on ERS refer to Starting And Oper ating e Electronic Speed Control ON This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 e Electronic Speed Control SET This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON This light will turn on when the ACC is ON m R For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC SET This light will turn on when the ACC is SET For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EVIC Amber Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include e Forward Collision Warning
280. ime Second Tone Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow Continuous Flashing Flashing Flashing Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the Uconnect System The available choices are Off Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the ParkSense soft key is pressed to disable the system the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYS TEM OFF message for approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts ParkSense will turn off the Rear Park Assist audible alert chime after approximately 3 seconds when an obstacle has been detected the vehicle is stationary and brake pedal is applied 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Adjustable Chime Volume Settings Chime volume settings can be selected from the Uconnect System The chime volume settings include LOW MEDIUM and HIGH The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles Service The ParkSense Rear Park A
281. ines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 473 CAUTION Continued The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the you vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air int
282. ing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381 5 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 6 Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 7 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temp
283. ing distances 428 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the
284. int This may Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure moisture This could result in a collision Automatic Transmission Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing Selection Of Lubricant the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also t jg important to use the proper transmission fluid to If damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Continued 536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder and will require more frequent fluid and filter changes Refe
285. ion matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to follow these warnings may cause the vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide with another vehicle object or person and cause There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for brak ing the vehicle serious or fatal injury Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec WARNING tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer e HSA is not a parking brake Always apply the Ready Alert Braking parking brake fully when leaving
286. is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer 284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 0000 Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter b
287. is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 587 MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fl
288. ital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key Then touch the back arrow soft key e Sync Time If Equipped Touch the Sync Time soft key to change this display When in this display you may have the radio set the time automatically To change the Sync Time setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key Then touch the back arrow soft key Safety Assistance e Front Collision Warning If Equipped Touch the Front Collision Warning soft key to change this display The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change the FCW status press and release the OFF Near or Far button Then touch the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 e ParkSense If Equipped The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle
289. itch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293 Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re sult in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch
290. ition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that include Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System ICS Brake Assist System BAS and the Electronic Stability Control ESC All four of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving condi tions Also your vehicle may be equipped with Hill Start Assist HSA Ready Alert Braking and Rain Brake Support Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 427 WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting o
291. itions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 0226023827 V Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position A Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the LATCH an chorage system to attach the child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages N A ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Can two child restraints be at tached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor ages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
292. ive Cruise Ready When the system is OFF the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control Off NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions e When you apply the brakes When the parking brake is set e When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE VERSE or NEUTRAL e When pushing the RES button without a previously set speed in memory To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button The ACC menu in the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control Ready ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 NE 156789mi 102 NE 156789mi 102 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Adaptive Cruise Control ACC OFF Ready 032363703 032363702 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Ready Adaptive Cruise Control ACC OFF To turn the system OFF push and release the ON OFF button again At this time the system will turn off and the EVIC will display Adaptive Cruise Control Off 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could acciden tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system off when you are not using it To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed NE 156789mi 102 ACC Set 032363724 ACC Set Re
293. k brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 16 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 17 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol ESC is off UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 18 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop 320 UND
294. key a second time to select LO level ventilation Press the soft key a third time to shut off the seat ventilation Controls Driver gt Heated EE Heated Seat Seat HI Vented Vented Teema Heated Screen Wheel D or r o RI J Ww nN J ser Radio Player Controis Climate Nav Phone amp More 0309009398 Ventilated Seats Soft Keys NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 during a remote start Refer to Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Active Head Restrain
295. l degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with greater caution e After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console Continued Retractable Cover UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299 035135226 Front Cupholders Heated And Cooled Cupholders If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled cupholders The cupholders are designed to help keep warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool 300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING When using the cupholder in the Hot position avoid contact with the heated portion of the cup holder in order to reduce the possibility of burns Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injuries medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise par ticular care in order to prevent serious burn injury Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects when operated in the Heat position Heated And Cooled C
296. l did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute ON OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you To mute the Uconnect Phone simply push the Mute button on the Phone main screen Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa push the Transfer button on the Phone main screen 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect amp Phone Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meter
297. l observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering ee STARTING AND OPERATING 421 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading D
298. l system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following Drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer Change the engine oil and oil filter Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline 472 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidel
299. l tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS sensor to become inoperable After using an after market tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your local dealer to have your sensor function checked After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
300. le to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the 504 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 585 In Mexico Contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Ou
301. league screen For example you can say Show MLB headlines or Show PGA headlines 2 You can replace Headlines with any menu items shown on a league screen For example you can say Show NFL Schedule and results or Show NCAA Basketball AP top 25 or Show Major League Baseball Teams 3 You can also say Show Current Weather or Show extended weather or Show five day forecast or Show ski info to get other forecasts NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Uconnect Voice Command Non phone Universal amp Mode Commads These commands can be spoken on any screen when not on a phone call after pushing the Uconnect voice command button evr on the steering wheel Navigation Cancels Route Player Home listening to Guidance screen will be your voice Prompt is shown on the command repeated touch screen 0475016869 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 NOTE 1 Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles 2 You can replace Player with Radio Navigation Phone Climate More or Settings 3 Navigation commands only work if equipped with 3 Navigation NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Uconnect Voice Command Navigation Universal Commands These commands can be spoken on any screen when
302. led tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction 2 Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint 3 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 022637851 Adjustable Headrest Downward Position 022636837 Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 5 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat 022035208 make sure the tether strap does not slip into the Tether Strap Mounting opening between the seatbacks as you remove lack in the strap 1 Cover A Tether Strap Hook P
303. level may increase 384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 12 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 13 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 14 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for warmer temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 15 Temperature Control Uconnect amp 4 3 Only Press the temperature soft key to regulate the tempera ture of the air inside the passenger compartment Moving the temperature bar into the red area indicates warmer temperatures Moving the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures Climate Control Functions A C Air Conditioning The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the air conditioning system is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin For improved fuel economy press the A C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings Also make sure to s
304. lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in an collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHI
305. low distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode gt e Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and r floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383 NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets e Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window gt demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions e Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting and defogging When the defrost mode is selected the blower
306. ls Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your at tention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone w Button is used to Ro enter the phone mode and make calls show recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When
307. lt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger First Row N A N A ALR Second ALR ALR ALR Row e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts
308. lumn unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System Touch the Controls soft key then touch the Heated Wheel soft key to turn on the heated steering wheel Press the Heated Wheel soft key a second time to turn the heated steering wheel off UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 3 01 82 out Controls Driver gt ji Heated f Heated Seat Seat HI Vented Vented S 8 amp Seat Soa V3 e Heated D FADE OFF Pri audio NW AY L 23 J w Ny 3 sRT 120 502110309009399 TE OFF Player Controis Climate Nav Phone amp More 0364013994 Player Controls Climate Nav Controls Soft Key Heated Steering Wheel Soft Key NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equi
309. mage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second and third gears direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds use the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup ee STARTING AND OPERATING 409 SPORT S If Equipped This mode alters the transmission s automatic shift schedule for sportier driving Upshift speeds are in creased to make full use of available engine power To toggle between DRIVE and SPORT modes touch the SPORT button on the Controls screen in the center touch panel Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected tha
310. maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine parts and cares about your satisfac tion HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 4 iO Iglo i ED m I ELECTRONIC STABILITY ii t p i i i i du E Y O T i amp i i x s Di i i f 3 i i E A Dp iw EI i Nc CO t 8 2 i f i 1910 cS H D ie ima la im TI i i i i i i i i
311. mbly CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise Front Low Beam Headlamp And Park Turn Lamp Models With High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID HID Headlamps The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service 558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Backup Lamps 1 Open trunk 2 Remove fastener from cover Fastener Cover 3 Remove cover 4 Twist the bulb one quarter turn to rem
312. meone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued 406 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine off and remove the Key Fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the transmis sion is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob and lock your vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF
313. mesi e erben 388 Engine OW seges ecrans epa nd Ra eed 515 Flashers Hazard Warning 0 6 482 Turn Signal 2222s wis agit rA Gaede 102 Flash To Pass 1 0 ee es 221 Flooded Engine Starting 205 398 Floor Consoles is raea eaa sa ees 303 Fluid Brake uidamduac ee FRG oe ee he Res 562 Fluid Capacities llle 560 Flid Leaks 2 4 cain an hace a GOPERUCY UN 102 Fluid Level Checks llle 537 Automatic Transmission 536 Br kes iig 6483 0 deg eG GREY exte xps 533 Cooling SYSTEM sa cec xke ERRORS 527 Engine Oll 5a roce Cx emer E eR bond Power Steering 508 INDEX MM Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 561 Fog TMCS sons cape tobe gee eee pent ok Sas eae 219 Folding Rear Seat mre 207 Forward Collision Warning 4 266 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 0004 500 Fee M FM TS 469 Additives 2525 4 544 404 25 nod be T ET 472 Cle n Air ss nos aed imma Sale de RU S 470 CONSERVING s cei Gai eem eer A 334 Ethanol 4 236 053 ee ee eec nd ee ae ds 470 Filler Door Gas Cap 000000 317 GaSOlME coss sk sad oe va awa ade s 469 Gauge occ vau iia 6 8 as Sof aere ee Ge a 317 Light shaw nes khe Ra ke 328 Materials Added llle 472 Methanol 52e sexa 470 Octane Rating is scs sce alee aces ego eos 469 Requirements ese ae x ach e sea ma ed 469 Saver Mode llle 334 Specifications ss teis dcs x SA GPa eee ee
314. mfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering NOTE Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door ee STARTING AND OPERATING 449 At least once a month Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated e Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maxim
315. mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377 CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents s
316. move your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do not the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed If this occurs e The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 The system will not be controlling the distance be To Cancel tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal The system will disable ACC without erasing the memory if You softly tap the brake pedal NE 156789mi 102 Driver You depress the brake pedal mmm Override You press the CANCEL switch The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph 25 km h An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates NOTE If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC TCS off ESC will automatically be re engaged 032363713 Driver Override 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NE 156789mi 102 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Canceled P R N 032363714 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cancelled To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if You push and release the ON OFF button You turn OFF the ignition To Resume Speed Press the RES button and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will displa
317. mplies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received includ ing interference that may cause undesired operation 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Phone 8 4 8 4N Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone Uconnect Phone supports the following features Voice Activated Features e Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smith s Mobile or Dial 248 555 1212 e Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming SMS messages e Hands Free text messaging Send a message to John Smith s Mobile Redialing last dialed numbers Redial e Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Back View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show Recent Calls e Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Smith Mobile Screen Activated Features Dialing via Keypad using the touchscreen Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis play
318. n ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There may not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary 032400173 Lane Changing Example 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ss Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead RA AL 032400174 Narrow Vehicle Example Stationary Objects And Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 General Information to the change of state from Adaptive Cruise Control to normal Cruise Control Cruise Ready will be displayed FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position Classification Specifications Cruise Off will be displayed if the system was in the 47 CER Part 15 ACC OFF position To switch back to Adaptive Cruise 47 C ER Part 15515 Control mode press the MODE button a second time m Normal Fixed Speed C
319. n choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Engine Off Power Delay Touch the Engine Off Power Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key Compass Settings e Variance Touch the Variance soft key to change this display Com pass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differ ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the dif ferences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Lap tops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interferen
320. n Smith your message will be sent Door Preset Messages 1 Yes 2 No 3 Okay N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 No ON D a A I can t talk right now Call me TII call you later I m on my way Thanks TII be late I will be lt number gt minutes late 11 12 13 14 15 16 See you in number minutes Stuck in traffic Start without me Where are you Are you there yet I need directions 17 I m lost 18 See you later Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the mobile phone OFF ON Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling Uconnect Hands Free Calling e Available commands while phone call is in progress Ty senos Cu ow apo Bor d T UM UDINE boton Nu on re These commands can be spoken from amy screen while a call is active after pushing the Uconnect voice command button e VR on the steering whoo 4 Ea me 4212 Send Voicemail Number is Dial Tones for dialed numbers stored in for 12344 Voicemail are sent Password
321. n also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly 544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders WARNING Continued Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent Before replacing a fuse make sure that the ignition with the cupholder in the center console is off and that all the other services are switched off NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed and or disengaged e If the replaced fuse blows again contact an autho FUSES rized dealer e If a general protection fuse for safety systems air bag system braking system power unit systems engine system gearbox system or steering system blows contact an authorized dealer WARNING When replacing a blown fuse always use an ap propriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse Never replace a fuse Front Power Distribution Center Fuses with another fuse of higher amp rating Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury fire and or property dam age The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment This module contains fuses and relays Continued
322. n damage or transmission failure UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 WARNING If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi nated you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire Gear Shift Indicator GSI If Equipped The Gear Shift Indicator GSI system is enabled on vehicles with a manual transmission or when a vehicle with an automatic transmission is in manual shift mode The GSI provides the driver with a visual indication within the EVIC when the recommended gear shift point has been reached This indication notifies the driver that changing gear will allow a reduction in fuel consump tion 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME When the shift up indicator is shown on the display the GSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear NE 156789 mi 102 0409010655 P R N L GSI Shift Down Indicator The GSI indicator in the EVIC remains illuminated until GSI Shift Up Indicator the driver changes gear or the driving conditions return When the shift down indicator is shown on the to a situation where changing gear is not required to display the GSI is advising the driver to engage a lower improve fuel consumption gear 0409010654 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 Oil Change Due Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator sy
323. n is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key and select ON or OFE Then touch the arrow back soft key e Blind Spot Alert If Equipped Touch the Blind Spot Alert soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deactivated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the OFF Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers If Equipped Touch the Rain Sensing soft key to change this display When this feature is selected
324. n the WARNING EVIC Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist system Always check CAUTION carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must con tinue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity i PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF e The vehicle must be driven slowly when using EQUIPPED ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear that the driver looks over his her shoulder when Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen using ParkSense image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau tion note to check entire surroundings across the top of ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277 the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located
325. n the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system Brake Lock Differential BLD controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for more information Brake Assist System BAS This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma neuvers This system detects an emergency braking situ ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce brak
326. nal In locations with left hand drive traffic Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left hand side of the Target vehicles When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic the ACC system will automatically detect traffic direction In this condition Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the right side of the Target vehicle This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right turn signal In this condition the ACC system will no longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location with left hand drive traffic Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer The information it displays depends on ACC system status Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ACC or Cruise is highlighted in the EVIC Status of the ACC or Cruise is also displayed in the menu line Press and release the SELECT right arrow button to display the following information Adaptive Cruise Control Off e When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Off 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Adaptive Cruise Control Ready e When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected the di
327. nd cause serious personal injury 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check belt fit peri odically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Recommendations For Attachi
328. nd tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and war
329. nded for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESC normally allows 430 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The ESC Off switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will illuminate To turn the ESC ON again mo mentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will turn off NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn the ESC ON again by momen tarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion WARNING e When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature de scribed in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Partial Off mode the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys tem is
330. nder inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION y mn M i shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure e Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Continued 448 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consump tion Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a co
331. ne call using Uconnect amp Phone The status is given for network signal strength and phone battery strength Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Chrysler Group LLC strongly recommends that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 WARNING Continued against the use of any handheld device while driv ing encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of appli cable laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dial ing a number with your connected Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice a command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the cal
332. nents which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo nents as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure 514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top
333. nes The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side of the vehicle side
334. ng The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented 072602046 518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty inf
335. ng Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range NOTE For phones which are not made a favorite the phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest phone paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio e Show Paired Phones e Connect My Phone Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device T 2 3 Touch the Player soft key to begin Change the Source to Bluetooth Touch the Bluetooth soft key to display the Paired Audio Devices screen Touch the Add Device soft key 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If there is no device currently connected with the system a pop up will appear 5 Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled audio device When prompted on the device enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect screen 6 Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting 7 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range NOTE For devices which are not made a favorite the device priority is determined by the order in
336. ng Child Restraints Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Combined LATCH Restraint Type Be ney m sm Seat Belt Only Lower Anchors Seat Belt Top Restraint Only prag Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether We LATCH The next generation of child safety 022668173 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information LATCH Pos
337. ng Lights Instrument Cluster Description 313 Warnings and Cautions 000 6 Warranty Information llle 586 Washer Adding Fluid vsus erxcirtRe e EG nani 523 Washers Windshield 0 0000 eae 227 Washing Vehicle 1 6 eee 539 Water Driving Through sss css cssess scrissero 418 Wheel and Wheel Trim 0 0 0 0 0 00005 540 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care seansas esmais 540 Wind Buffeting 6010 INDEX ae Window Fogging 542 em em Rea 388 Windshield Wiper Blades 522 WindOoWS caes debe A ton Gok e ee dee aah id 40 Windshield Wipers 0 0000000 225 Power ces de Pia nh ob hw tikasi emes 40 Wiper Blade Replacement 522 Windshield Defroster 0 0 00 0002 eae 100 Wipers Intermittent sss amasi man osma atiman sms 226 Windshield Washers e csoc scams eset eitas ers 225 Wipers Rain Sensitive 1 6 6c eee eee 228 FU i eus RES dni EUR dra ER RUNS 523 INSTALLATIDN OF RADID TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehi cle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made
338. ng compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523 Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill th
339. ng on several factors including the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Knee Air Bag may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial decel eration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position or in the ACC position the air bag system is not on and the ai
340. ning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 8 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL LS The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 WARNING 11 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the l
341. nment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance 590 WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 502 INDEX eee About Your Brakes 0 00000000004 422 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 424 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Co
342. not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature e Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing a numbered sequence Barge In Overriding Prompts The vk button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se For example if a prompt is asking There are two numbers with the name John Say the full name you could push the vRbutton and say John Smith to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Voice Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length 1 Push the More button on the touchscreen where available then push the Settings button on the touchscreen 2 Push the Display button on the touchscreen then scroll down to Voice Response Length 3 Select either Brief or Detailed by pushing the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to indicate your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempt ing to make a pho
343. not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 19 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped Lal ee The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes ina
344. ntrol 240 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreze 529 Adding Fuel sires ressa abeneh eaaa 474 Adding Washer Fluid 005 523 Additives Fuel llle 472 Adjustable Pedals llle 234 Airbag su cag Rees eS Ces x xe m eU cae 60 Airbag Deployment 00000000000 71 Airbag Light eR Rer EORR 68 Airbag Maintenance llle 73 Airbag Side sexe ace mee och ere cene d 64 Airbag Window Side Curtain 64 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 516 Air Conditioner Maintenance sss 518 Air Conditioning Filter llle 388 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 389 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 518 Air Conditioning System 00 386 Air Pressure Tires 0 0 0 0 ce ee 448 Alarm Lights 4 4 3 00 idedteySdide fiesta ae 319 Alarm Panis escteg E eR we Pee 24 Alarm Security Alarm aminman aie ess 18 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 0 528 Disposal sic v Cute en erg eder WE a ed gs 531 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 4 424 Anti Lock Warning Light ills 318 Appearance Care sisse e m b nd 538 Arming System Security Alarm 18 Assist Hill Start llle 432 Auto Down Power Windows sues 41 Automatic Dimming Mirror
345. ntry Key Immobilizer system is not com patible with some aftermarket remote starting sys tems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer This procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys tem serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer
346. o not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and ram 422 STARTING AND OPERATING FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY IF EQUIPPED This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 423 NOTE WARNING e When the parking brake is applied and the
347. o the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against Continued 474 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open ADDING FUEL 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located in the driver s door map pocket Fuel Filler Door Release Switch 2 Open the fuel filler door STARTING AND OPERATING 475 There is no fuel filler cap A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel ing NOTE Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allowing the flapper door to open 5 Fill the vehicle with fuel when the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 6 Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door Fuel Filler Door NOTE A funnel is provided located in the trunk in the spare tire area to open the flapper door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can NOTE In certain cold conditions ice may prevent the fuel door from opening If this occurs lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup and re release the fuel door using the inside r
348. o remove slack in the lap belt portion pull A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the BED 3 it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the injury A belt worn under the arm can cause inter belt in a collision nal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a colli sion e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immedi ately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not res
349. o the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage Center Seat LATCH If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position do not use that outboard position If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt do not install a child seat in that outboard position WARNING Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint Please refer to Installing The LATCH Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here To Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint 1 If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructions below See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has 2 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can
350. o volume In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Voice Text Reply Uconnect amp Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth to use this feature If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Bluetooth the messaging button will be grayed out and the feature will not be available for use 68 uy FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Ww 72 Messaging gt Inbox x Eg 14 James Butler ES 13 248 576 5459 E d 12 Beatrice Adams eR 11 Sanjiv Prabaker fe 10 Lin Ford E3 9 Jay Kay 7 tems in ist S wf Wi Player srr amp More 0305017067 D A Controls Climate Nav Phone Voice Text List NOTE Uconnect Phone SMS is only available when the vehicle is not moving Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect amp Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message t FM 95 5 9 22 70 out Me ill be there soon gt Reply gt Forward e Climate Nav B Phone sD Er Player ser amp More 0305017068 Controls Voice Text Reply ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Once a message is received and viewed or listened to you will have the following options e Send a Reply e
351. oadside Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Roadside Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone kevpad you can utilize the touchscreen or press the vk button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 ff you can press the Sve button and say Send 3 7 4 6 Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries For exampl
352. occur Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued WARNING Continued Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the ve
353. oice command button SVR on the steering wheel Commands only available Commands available in Commands only available in AM FM mode AM FM Satellite mode in Satellite mode Audio will Audio will Audio will Audio will change to the change to change to next Satellite satellite station Satellite Rock Station 80 s on 8 Channel 8 Audio will change to the change to 950 AM or FM AM frequency or Satellite Channel stored in preset 5 0475016871 Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 NOTE 1 You can replace 950 AM with any other AM or FM frequency such as 98 7 FM 2 You can replace 80 s on 8 with any other satellite station name received by the radio m 3 You can replace 8 with any other satellite channel number received by the radio 4 You can replace rock with any of the satellite music types NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Uconnect Hands Free Music Control These commands can be spoken when playing music from your SD card USB device CD or iPod after pushing the Uconnect voice commands button E VR on the steering wheel Radio will play the the album Radio will play a Audio Book Dr Radio will play Ragtime the Artist Scott Song Maple Leaf s Rock tne Playlist Party Podcast Weekly Jekyll and Mr track B Favorites Joplin Rag Tunes Auto Podcast Hyde
354. ollow ing licenses United States Canada MRXC4W4MA4 2546A CAWAMAA STARTING AND OPERATING 469 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 6 4L Engine The 6 4L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality premium unleaded 5 gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or 800dfal higher Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle 470 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated
355. omatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated e You can start out from a stop in first or second gear Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions STARTING AND OPERATING 413 WARNING 3 01 82 out Controls Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their mx ud grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or iius Sen personal injury Driver Hi Vented Vented By on Seat SPORT MODE Hoated D Se This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled damping system This system reduces body roll and pitch D wo w RY d in many driving situations including cornering accelera Playet Con os Climate Nav Phone amp More tion and braking There are three modes of operation SPORT TRACK Mode e Automatic Auto Mode This is the default position when the vehicles ignition is first turned on This mode will give a sporty but comfortable ride Within this mode the suspension will adapt to the vehicle inputs including vehicle speed steering inputs brak ing and acceleration e Sport Mode This mode is driver selectable when the vehicle is placed in SPORT mode press the CON TROLS button and then the SPORT button on the display screen The
356. ombinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e e e e e Audio quality is maximized under Low To Medium Blower Setting Low To Medium Vehicle Speed Low Road Noise Smooth Road Surface Fully Closed Windows Dry Weather Conditions Operation From The Driver s Seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling Uconnect Hands Free Calling e Available commands while phone call is in progress Ty senos Cu ow apo Bor d T UM UDINE boton Nu on re These
357. ompound command form into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect amp Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR engine Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pushing the Voice Command vRbutton on your steering wheel Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep To activate t
358. on 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until mm the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mM 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To repro
359. on The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the ve hicles audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect amp Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or another prompt For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mo bile For each feature explanation in this section only the compound command form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound command form voice command Search for John Smith or you can break the c
360. on the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE message and a graphic showing the pressure values of STARTING AND OPERATING 465 each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing or Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible changing color An Inflate to XX message will also be and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition those displayed flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure inflation NE 196 90 102 value as shown in the Inflate to XX message Once the Tire Pressure system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the 33 33 EVIC will stop flashing or change color back to the original color and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off P The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes R above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive N this information D S 33 33 PSI 0558007136 Tire Pressure Monitor Display 466 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NE 156789mi 102 Low Tire Pressure Inflate to 33 33 33 33 0558007135 Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of
361. on and the transmission shift lever is in the RE VERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Blind Spot Alert If Equipped When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e ParkView Backup Camera
362. on system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517 WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable Battery Location clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handli
363. oners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Advanced Front Air Bag Features WARNING The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel because any such determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to which may receive information from the front impact sensors inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an covers or attempt to open them manually You may impact that requires air bag deployment This low output damage the air bags and you could be injured is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is because the air bags may no longer be functional used for more severe collisions The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side
364. ont Map Reading Light Switches Courtesy Lights N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281 Sunglasses Bin Door At the front of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compart ment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close 033333448 Sunglasses Bin Door GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery The HomeLink buttons located on either the overhead console headliner or sunvisor designate the three differ ent HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button 282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 034033576 034000355 HomeLink Buttons Overhead Consoles HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor Headliner NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink amp Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that
365. or this profile Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then press and release button 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by following steps 1 4 above and press ing the UNLOCK button instead of LOCK on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will display in the EVIC if equipped To recall the memory settings for driver 1 press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry the memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry Unlock into the driver s door using the Key Fob linked to position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver 2 press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry the memory settings
366. or to move Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Heated Mirrors If Equipped Ittt These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster if equipped Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light pa LAM Illuminated Vanity Mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of Sun Visor To use the Slide On Rod feature of the sun visor rotate the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window grab the sun visor and pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position To use the extender feature of the sun visor grab the extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward Slide On Rod Feature 030440176 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE BLIND SPOT MONITORING BSM IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar ba
367. ormation Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519 WARNING Continued E Recovery And Recycling R134a If The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other CAUTION service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning PAG compressor oil and refrigerants system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If Equipped HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro fluorocarbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmen tal Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product with a low GWP Global Warming Potential However 520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NO
368. ortier more ag gressive shift pattern In Manual mode the transmission will hold gear at redline during manual shifting console shifter or paddle switches 14 Sport Suspension The light will illuminate when Sport or Track F mode is selected When Sport mode is selected the EVIC will display Sport Mode Active Suspension This mode provides perfor mance based tuning with improved handling through an electronic controlled damping system This system re duces body roll and pitch in many driving situations including cornering acceleration and braking When Track Mode is Selected the EVIC will display Track Mode Activated Suspension and Transmission In ad dition to SPORT suspension Track mode also affects transmission shifting Refer to AutoStick in Starting And Operating for further information 15 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light es If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Loc
369. oth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen Bluetooth Connain in progress ease wait e If No is selected touch the Settings soft key from the Uconnect Phone main screen e Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the 5 Uconnect screen 0305016947 e See step 4 to complete the process Mobile Phone Pairing Progress 4 Uconnect Phone will display an in progress screen 5 When the pairing process has successfully completed while the system is connecting the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Pair Additional Mobile Phones 1 Touch the Settings soft key from the Phone main screen Touch the Add Device soft key Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecti
370. our phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth then these commands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Uconnect Hands Free Calling Universal amp Connect Commands These commands can be spoken from any screen after pushing the Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel V d 1 n oon slow wil revertto Bluetooth Phone _ List of paired List of paired g ir arende Settings screen Bluetooth audio Bluetooth your voice PEED will be shown devices will be phones will be command atan Waite Connection shown shown process will be completed with touch screen 0475016866 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration VOICE COMMAND Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav 4 VR NOTE Take care to speak into th
371. ove MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559 a 5 Reinstall new bulb 6 Install cover and fastener License Lamp 1 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 073300294 Socket Assembly 1 License Lamp Bulb 2 Socket 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install the screws 560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric 19 Gallons 72 Liters Fuel Approximate Engine Oil With Filter 6 4 Liter Engine SAE 0W 40 Synthetic API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 6 4 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant OAT cool 15 2 Quarts 14 4 Liters ant conforming to MS 12106 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full syn thetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API
372. ove the Key Fob and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to Continued be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the Key Fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the transmission is locked in PARK securing the ve hicle against unwanted movement Continued 402 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued CAUTION Continued Children should be warned not to touch the park e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle ing brake brake pedal or the shift lever has come to a complete stop and the engine is at Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or idle speed in a location accessible to children and do not e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN speed mode A child could operate power windows other Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot controls or move the vehicle is firmly pressing the brake pedal
373. ow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area f you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate rear doors open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system 100 THINGS
374. p reading lights are mounted in the over AE Peon GO DUO OE REE IS head console 031433151 031433150 Front Map Reading Light Switches Front Map Reading Lights Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility To turn the lights off press the switch a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 Courtesy Lights Ambient Light The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light corner of the lens To turn the lights off press thelensa feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil second time ity of the floor and center console area 031464435 033333449 Courtesy Lights Ambient Light 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition to the ON RUN position or cycle the light switch Dimmer Controls The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel 031463856 Dimmer Controls Wi
375. p to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system 534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require WARNING ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine leak and a checkup may be needed Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued To avoid contamination from foreign matter or Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling po
376. pair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center M A l N T E N A N ie E S ie H E D U L E S 8 570 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule I Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 21 Inspect the rear axle fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule OCO CO C O C O L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or other severe usage Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 571 ij A 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 72 000 Miles
377. parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense Sys tem Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h ParkSense amp Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 59 in 150 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense amp Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obst
378. parks away from the battery 2221 060836876 1 Remote Positive 4 Post 2 Remote Negative Post 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the oe parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this Connecting The Jumper Cables could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle Jump Starting Procedure 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper WARNING cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could negative post of the booster battery result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499
379. posted speed limits ee STARTING AND OPERATING 439 EXAMPLE Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire 440 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABC
380. pped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods Continued WARNING Continued Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows the brake accelerator and clutch pedals if equipped to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat cushion side shield UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF The pedals cannot be adjusted when the
381. quipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle 458 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING WARNING Continued Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure ani loss Ore ele control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use e jns km Be with load ratings TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES Never use a tire with
382. r bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment 0 rv Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on
383. r eyes or clothing TIRE FIT is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin It causes skin eye and respira tory irritation Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is any contact with clothing Continued 490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Continued kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex In case of to place the valve stem in this position before proceed an allergic reaction or rash consult a physician ing immediately Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children Du mE If swallowed rinse mouth immediately with plenty 3 Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce in Gear manual transmission and turn Off the igni vomiting Consult a physician immediately tion 4 Set the parking brake B Setting Up To Use TIREFIT 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Sealant Mode position Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT A Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle s Hazard Warning flashers 2 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the cap 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the from the fitting at the end of the hose deflated tire is in a position that is near
384. r mobile phone Uconnect Phone will then interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will display a pop up showing Answer Ignore or Transfer Press the button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the amp vRbutton and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls or from the phonebooks To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Join Calls in this section 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the button until you hear a single beep indicat ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Also you can press the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen Join Calls When two calls are in pro
385. r to Replacement Tires in this section for further infor mation Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style Tire pressure e Distance driven Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 457 WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original e
386. r In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle NOTE The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the doors are locked using the door panel switch a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the vehicle and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected outside the vehicle The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the Passive Entry door handles The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs e The
387. r look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens Turning ParkView On Or Off With Touchscreen Radio 1 Turn the Radio on 2 Push the More soft key 3 Push the Settings soft key 4 Push the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key 5 Push the check box soft key next to Parkview Backup Camera to enable disable UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 OVERHEAD CONSOLE Front Map Reading Lights The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of Opener HomeLink and power sunroof switches may the console These buttons are backlit for night time also be included if equipped visibility 033333450 031433150 Overhead Console Front Map Reading Lights 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The Courtesy Lights lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top corner of the lens To turn the lights off press the lens a second time 031433151 031464435 Fr
388. r to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifica tions Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537 transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is provided Your authorized dealer can check your trans mission fluid level using a special service dipstick If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis sion damage CAUTION If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your autho rized dealer immediatel
389. r view of the sensor e The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph 25 km h and the system automatically disengages itself The distance setting is changed The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activation ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead NE 156789mi 102 BRAKE 032363710 Brake Alert 3 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NE 156789mi 102 BRAKE NE 156789mi 102 BRAKE XE y 032363711 GS 032363712 Brake Alert 2 Brake Alert 1 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 Overtake Aid When driving with ACC engaged and following a target vehicle the system will provide an additional accelera tion to assist in passing vehicles in front This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn sig
390. r wheels OFF the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 482 Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT 5 5 es ns 490 B IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 2r e 482 W JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES 496 ll WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Preparations For Jump Start SPECIFICATIONS 22 i32 der uer 3 eee ues d 483 i Jump Starting Procedure Torque Specifications 00 484 E FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE E TIEEHT KIT IF EQUIPPED 44453223 485 W SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE TIREFUD Strage esmansa cone eee ei 485 E TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 503 O TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation 486 TIREFIT Usage Precautions 487 482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used
391. ration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear NOTE e After launch control has been aborted the vehicle will resort back to ESC Full ON e Launch mode is not available within the first 500 miles of engine break in DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 418 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 2 3 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible Keep tires properly inflated Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
392. re Rotation The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped with all season tires is the forward cross as shown in the following diagram EL GE c Eng E 055703771 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 461 The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire 462 STARTING AND OPERATING ME T
393. re is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and within 5 ft 1 5 m of either Passive Entry door handle Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors To Enter The Trunk With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the deck lid press the button on the right side of CHMSL Center High Mounted Stop Light which is located on the deck lid CHMSL Button NOTE If you inadvertently leave your vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless another one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmit ters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft 1 5 m of the deck lid E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 To Lock The Vehicle s Doors Do NOT grab the door handle when pressing the door handle lock button This could unlock the door s With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handles press the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking Press The Door Handle Button To Lock 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicl
394. reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with out erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of To Decrease Speed Dp ety or MERC eni Hm mt When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can de U S Speed mph crease speed by pushing the SET button e Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the Of U S mph or Metric km h units button results in an increase of 1 mph U S Speed mph e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the
395. rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter To make your selection touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sound Horn With Remote Start Touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Re mote Start soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sound Horn With Lock Touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the horn will chirp when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Remote Door Unlock Order Touch the Remote Door Unlock Order soft key to change this display When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter UNLOCK button When Unlock Driver Door Only 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss On 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE trans mitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected
396. recise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section Moving the shift lever to the left or right while in the DRIVE position or tapping one of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles if equipped will manually select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1 2 3 etc 404 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE e After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold e If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the ignition to the OFF position before restarting Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the ignition is not cycled to the OFF position first PA
397. respond without pushing the Voice Command vRbutton on your steering wheel Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply push the w button on your steering wheel and say a com mand or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a push of the button on the radio control head 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu You can also push the or vk button on your steering wheel when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing NOTE e You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in PARK 1 You can do either of the following a Press the SETTINGS hard key page down to the Phone Bluetooth soft key press it and you will see the Paired Phones screen If there are no paire
398. restraint system DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steer ing column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with two RKE trans mitters One RKE transmitter can be linked to memory position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to memory position 2 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The memory seat switch is located on the driver s door Programming The Memory Feature trim panel The switch consists of three buttons The S button which is used to activate the memory save function and the 1 and 2 buttons which are used to recall either of two pre programmed memory profiles To create a new memory profile perform the following NOTE Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory 1 Place the ignition into the RUN position 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences ie seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station presets
399. rized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 565 referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation At Each Stop For Fuel Check the engine oil level Refer to Maintenance Procedures Engine Oil in Maintaining Your Ve hicle for further information e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once A Month Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage nspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and power steering and add as needed Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change Change the engine oil filter Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A N T E N A N e I S e H E D U L E S 8 Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals M A l N u E N A N ie E S ie H E D U L E S 8 566 MAINTENANCE SCH
400. robable a warning message both audible and visual will be displayed on the EVIC When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable the warning message will be deactivated NOTE The minimum speed for FCW activation is 10 mph 16 km h WARNING Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to avoid a collision on its own nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 Changing FCW Status The FCW feature can be set to far set to near or turned off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The FCW Status Off Near or Far will be displayed in the Uconnect display The default status of FCW is the Far setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which allows for a more dynamic driving experience Changing the
401. roper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the 388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes objectionable increase blower speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side win dows Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur e Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will automati cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield When this occurs recirculation will be unavailable Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce
402. rs Approach Light Modes Of Operation ss o cosa dosad saa dsa 124 MEUPE oi iaie ae Loe O the rs 125 Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped 112 Uconnect 43 ss ch ee eee mee 125 Operation vied cae die gi tae dee eels 128 Phone Call Features 0 05 134 Uconnect Phone Features 139 Advanced Phone Connectivity 143 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone 0000 0005 144 General Information 5 147 Uconnect Phone 8 4 8 4N sess 148 Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav 000005 148 Op rations iu d epa ey d9 RP ed tgr 151 Phone Call Features 2 05 162 Uconnect Phone Features 167 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Advanced Phone Connectivity 171 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone 0000 172 General Information 0 183 VOICE COMMAND 0 00000000 183 Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav 0000 183 Uconnect Voice Commands 186 SEATS ginei ae cata eu acne oa bomen ere Ga oe 197 Power Seats If Equipped 197 Power Lumbar If Equipped 200 Heated Seats If Equipped 201 Ventilated Seats If Equipped 204 Head Restraints c
403. rther information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlatch The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights will turn on the park lights and turn signals will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or
404. rtunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495 5 Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 4 Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos sible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace ment NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the autho rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the TIREFIT service kit F Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement 1 2 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 clear in color Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle Press the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly 5 ing Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 in the housing so that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing Press the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 and return the hose to its storage area located on the bottom of the air pump Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the vehicle 496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and
405. ruise Control Mode WARNING In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a normal n the normal Cruise Control mode the system will fixed speed Cruise Control mode is available for cruis not react to vehicles ahead In addition the proximity ing at fixed speeds The normal Cruise Control mode is warning does not activate and no alarm will sound designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since ing the driver to operate the accelerator Cruise Control neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph vehicle to vehicle distance is detected Be sure to 32 km h maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and To change modes press the MODE button when the the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is system is in either the OFF READY or SET position selected While pressing the mode button a chime alerts the driver 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To Set A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed NOTE You must observe the display when setting or changing speed not the speedometer To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set you can increase speed by pushing the RES button The speed increment shown is dependant on th
406. s Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid if equipped or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B MIRRORS sseeeennn RI 110 Power Mirrors 0 2 2 0 cece eee eee 113 3 Inside Day Night Mirror 110 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 114 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 110 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 114 Outside Mirrors 0 00000 c eee 111 Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of Outside Mirrors Folding Feature S ti MISO sb dE Vade Eee oe vs 115 If Equipped 2e Rr RR 112 Bi BLIND SPOT MONITORING BSM Divers Ouisitle Automatic Dinamie Minor IE EOUIPPED seis zedxea s a weaned wk 116 Lf Equipped coe os P pee erm mem a 112 Rear Cross Pathi scetur An 122 Outside Mirro
407. s next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Lights After pressing the Lights soft key the following settings will be available e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Dim High Beams SmartBeam If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams soft key until a check mark appears next to set
408. s Entry C RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start E e Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK Doors closed e Hood closed e Trunk closed e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Battery at an acceptable charge level e RKE panic button not pressed e System not disabled from previous remote start event e Vehicle security alarm not active Ignition in OFF position WARNING Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in jury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to r
409. s activated through Uconnect radio touchscreen Refer to Customer Programmable Fea tures under Uconnect SETTINGS in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375 Selecting Surround Sound through the Uconnect radio activates the Harman Kardon Logic7 multichan nel surround sound technology in your vehicle Some audio will sound better in DSS modes others in Stereo mode When in Surround Sound mode balance is set auto matically Fader control is available in surround mode but should be set to the center position for optimal surround performance STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045040915 Remote Sound Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume 376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which
410. s away from you Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period Performance is maximized under Low To Medium Blower Setting Low To Medium Vehicle Speed Low Road Noise e Smooth Road Surface Fully Closed Windows Dry Weather Condition Even though the system is designed for many languages and accents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page before speaking the digit string make sure to say Send ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 NOTE It is recommended that you do not store names in your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion Phonebook Mobile and Favorites name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number com binations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported Far End Audio Performance Audio quality is maximized under Low To Medium Blower Setting Low To Medium Vehicle Speed Low Road Noise e Smooth Road Surface Fully Closed Windows Dry Weather Conditions Operation From The Driver s Seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audi
411. sage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system oper ating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off in DRIVE the instru ment cluster will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF for five seconds Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc are placed within 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sg ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed i
412. se of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip
413. seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution ee STARTING AND OPERATING 401 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING Continued WARNING e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal e When leaving the vehicle always rem
414. sed sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Automatic Transmission Vehicles The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK Manual Transmission Vehicles The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any gear and enters stand by mode when the Park Brake is engaged the vehicle is not in REVERSE and the vehicle is stationary 030440174 BSM Warning Light The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft or 3 8 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 23 ft 7 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de tection zo
415. signal The indi cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained 4 Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are programming 288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink amp To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home of
416. similar inflatable items However use only the Air Pump Hose 7 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them The TIREFIT Sealant is only in tended to seal punctures less than 4 6 mm diameter in the tread of your vehicle Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489 WARNING Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the TIREFIT kit Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1 4 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel Continued WARNING Continued Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat source e A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you e Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hai
417. sing your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing O O O C C L Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N e I S e H E D U L E S 8 578 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or 150 Months Maintenance Ser vice Schedule I Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Rotate tires T Replace the engine air cleaner filter Q Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes I Flush and replace the engine coolant at 150 000 miles 240 000 km or 120 months whichever comes first M A l N T E N A N Cc E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 579 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for wh
418. soft key Scroll to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Assistance Remove From Favorites Favorites 4 The Options pop up will display touch Remove from Favs 3 Touch the Options soft key 4 Touch the next to appropriate Favorite that is to be altered 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 68 FM917 10 10 54 out V 72 Phone Call Features EUNDUM The following features can be accessed through the Voicemail Edit Number Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available and Empt TT supported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan f Pepe Roni For example if your mobile service plan provides three tix Buddy s Pizza way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service pro vider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call q sY Radio Player Controis Climate Nav Phone amp More Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone Emergency And Towing Assistance Favorites Redial 5 The Options pop up will appear and you can choose between Editing the number or resetting the number to default Dial by pushing in the number Voice Commands Dial by Saying a Name Call by Saying a Phonebook Name Redial or Call Back Favorites ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 e Mobile Phonebook Recent Call Log e SMS Message Viewer Dial By Saying A Number 1
419. spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the EVIC will display a low pressure mes sage and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing or in a different color An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the pressure value displayed will be updated and stop flashing or return to its original color as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires 468 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Vehicles With Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value or a pressure value in a different color An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 1
420. spect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary 11 Rotate tires T Inspect the rear axle fluid O O O C C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A l N T E N A N e I S e H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N ie E S C H E D U L E S 8 568 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule I Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Rotate tires T Replace the engine air cleaner filter Q Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a 0 CC C O C Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replac
421. splay soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to indicate your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempt ing to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength and phone battery strength Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Chrysler Group LLC strongly recommends that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driv ing encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of appli cable laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth mo bile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconne
422. splay will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready ACC SET When ACC is set the set speed will display The set speed will continue to display in place of the odometer reading when changing the EVIC display while ACC is set The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC activity occurs which may include any of the following e Set Speed Change e Distance Setting Change e System Cancel e Driver Override e System Off e ACC Proximity Warning e ACC Unavailable Warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity Display Warnings And Maintenance Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning The ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of poor visibility such as in snow or heavy rain The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to Obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the EVIC will display Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle and the system will deactivate ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 The Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message To keep the ACC System operating properly it is impor can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly tant to note the following maintenance items reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC system will recover after the
423. ss the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn off the TIREFIT kit 2 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instru ment panel EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493 3 Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage location Quickly proceed to D Drive Ve hicle CAUTION The metal end fitting from Power Plug 8 may get hot after use so it should be handled carefully e Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant con tacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s inte rior It can also result in sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma nent damage to the kit D Drive Vehicle Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h WARNING TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using TIREFIT Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h until th
424. ssist System During vehicle start up when the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SERVICE PARK ASSIST or SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SERVICE PARK ASSIST or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM mes sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If CLEAN PARK ASSIST appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC make sure the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer If SERVICE PARK ASSIST or SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see an authorized dealer mmmm X UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275 Cleaning The ParkSense amp System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense amp System U
425. ssive Entry feature dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke Trunk Emergency Internal Release 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE BEEEEEEEEEEARMAMEEMAMAMMMEEMEE NNNM OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way o
426. start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel or Help These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear available commands press the Uconnect Voice Command vRbutton and say Help You will hear available commands for the screen displayed Natural Speech Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user i
427. sted forward or Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward shoulder belt is no longer resting against your the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release chest In a collision you could slide under the seat the switch when the desired position is reached belt which could result in serious injury or death E WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Continued 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support _ FA Power Lumbar Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
428. stem The Oil Change Due message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Fuel Economy displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy func tions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode Distance To Empt
429. su 236 Speedomeltet soau c depo Pa med ald Rage te 317 en INDEX 607 Star ng acia goa XR nr s RR dex ac RR a 27 Automatic Transmission 395 Cold Weather 22 a n Rr en 398 Engine Fails to Start sretan adausi aa aaa 398 Remote 643a ER Eh dore X deg 27 Starting and Operating 004 395 Starting Procedures donsa netese sa 395 Steering Column Controls llle 220 Column Lock 20 0 00000 ee eee 230 POWER e e a kee Ru Bee ee he eite Medo mew 420 Tilt COMMA e ch eng 24e 3a exc ae yd a 230 Wheel Heated oe serra 4046804 Ca Re 232 Wheel Tilt 2 0 0 0 0 ee ns 230 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 375 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 375 Storage Storage Vehicle acea Rb ats ae a as 387 Storing Your Vehicle Stuck Breeing e acea ier a ERR ied 500 Sunglasses Storage eese esee 281 Sun Roof sca ce dg ev Der UP e bas 291 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 60 Synthetic Engine Oil 4 ies Rr ee e E 515 System Remote Starting o secco llle 27 Tachometer 2 cust ain usa exiget bo ae grs 313 Telescoping Steering Column 230 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 386 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 322 Tilt Steering Column llle 230 Time Delay Headlight 20 218 Tire and Loading Information Placard 442 THREE ua toh aed ee ERES der EKER qd 485 Tire
430. t it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR 480 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWRs Refer to the Tire Placard for your vehicle s proper tire pressure TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Recreational towing with all four wheels on the ground or using a towing dolly is NOT ALLOWED The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle behind an other vehicle is on a vehicle trailer with all fou
431. t belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor ALR feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occu pants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deploye
432. t could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped the transmission will remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will con tinue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position 1 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation 410 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fifth gear The transmission will automatically shif
433. t into Overdrive if the following con ditions are present e The shift lever is in the DRIVE position e Vehicle speed is sufficiently high The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator AUTOSTICK Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or Console Mounted Shifter AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize en gine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and down shifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving and many other situations 051369002 1 Shift Paddle 2 4 Shift Paddle Operation When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between the five available gears To engage AutoStick simply tap the shift lever to the right or left while in the STARTING AND OPERATING 411 DRIVE position or tap one of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles if equipped Tapping to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear while using to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear When AutoStick is active the current transmission gear is displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC portion of the instrument cluster In
434. t position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are four delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 CAUTION Continued In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park posi tion before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunc
435. t use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open 540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild so
436. t will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Uconnect amp Voice Command Sve button Uconnect Voice Commands The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are avail able at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect Voice Com mand Sve button Changing The Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command EVR button 2 Say a command e g Help ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com mand system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Starting Voice Recognition VR Session In Radio Player Modes In this mode you can say the following commands NOTE The commands can be said on any screen when a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice Command vk button Source To switch to the audio source say Change source to Disc for example This command can be given in any mode or screen e Track to change the track 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Voice Tree Uconnect Voice Command AM FM Satellite Radio availble commands These commands can be spoken when the AM FM or Satellite radio is playing after pushing the Uconnect v
437. tance and speed measurements display while the event is taking place e The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com plete stop The distance and speed measurements will continue to display until the conditions are met for another event to be recorded e Pressing the SELECT button will clear the current run and prepare the cluster to record a new run 1 8 Mile 1 4 Mile When selected this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1 8 mile 1 4 mile within 25 seconds The feature will ready when the vehicle is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will display when conditions are met for the event to begin 0 0s will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1 8 mile 1 4 mile in less then 25 seconds The time will continue to display until the vehicle is brought to a stop Instantaneous G Force When selected this screen displays the current G Force lateral and longitudinal Peak G Force When selected this screen displays all four G Force values two lateral and two longitudinal When a force greater than zero is measured the display will update the value as it climbs As the G Force falls the peak forces will continue to display E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 Pressing and holding the SELECT button for five seconds will clear the peak force values Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press
438. ter 418 B POWER STEERING 5 4244 ReI3E ED re Rn 420 Power Steering Fluid Check 421 E FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY IE EQUIPPED oc ee coo con USERS RE RR 422 E PARKING BRAKE 543v o8 0654 R OI 422 E ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM 424 E ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 426 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 426 Traction Control System TCS 427 Brake Assist System BAS 427 Electronic Stability Control ESC 428 Hill Start Assist HSA 432 Ready Alert Braking 433 Rain Brake Support 00 434 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light 434 Synchronizing ESC 0000006 435 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 436 Tire Markings 436 Tire Identification Number TIN 439 Tire Terminology And Definitions 441 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 442 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 E TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 447 W TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 460 Tire Pressure uoo dicm nun e pom e 447 Tire Rotation lees 460 Tire Inflation Pressures 0 448 W TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS
439. th the parking lights or headlights on rotating the left dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders if equipped 031463857 Instrument Panel Dimmer Dome Light Position Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer EVIC if equipped and radio when the position lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON RUN or ACC position The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se mist Ro 031563088 Windshield Wiper Washer Control Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first deten
440. the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display Miles Per Gallon MPG Liters Per 100 km L 100km The Miles Per Gallon MPG Liters Per 100 km L 100km feature displays instantaneous fuel economy in a bar graph below the DTE this function cannot be reset Press the BACK button to return to the main menu Vehicle Speed Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Speed displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the SELECT button to display the current speed in mph or km h Pressing the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC Trip Info Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the ON RUN position 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT P
441. the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob aS START 2 The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle STOP should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead OR The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park ing ENGINE To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand Keyless Ignition Node KIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0202003287 Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob 0202008030 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 you to cycle the ignition to OFF In addition to the chime s I als WARNING Continued the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or NOTE With the Uconnect system the power window others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil switches radio power sunroof if equippe
442. the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors ee STARTING AND OPERATING 467 Vehicles With Full Size Spare 2 4 5 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings Using tire chains on the vehicle Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed 1 3 The matching full size
443. the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on several factors including the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column When the ORC detects a collision requiring the 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses Advanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20
444. ticipated 530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE e Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recom mended and can result in cooling system damage If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency have a authorized dealer drain flush and refill with OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 as soon as possible Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531 WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are
445. ting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle for further informa tion e Daytime Running Lights If Available When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Steering Directed Lights If Equipped When this feature is selected the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel To make your selection touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363 e Flash Headlights With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Head lights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to re
446. ting on your neck The retrac tor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi tion If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best 4 022667971 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Be
447. tion lever inward toward the steering column and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mist Feature Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed
448. tional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button NOTE The message Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button Cancel Remote Start Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following occur The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm Any engine warning lights come on Low Fuel Light turns on The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pressed e The shift lever is moved out of PARK The brake pedal is pressed DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock the front doors pull the inside door handle to the first detent To unlock the rear doors pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING For personal security and safety in the event of a collision lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle e When leaving the vehicle always remo
449. tly attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 442 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door 055001823 B Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information Placard STARTING AND OPERATING 443 Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle Total weight your vehicle can carry SEATING CAPACITY S TOTAL 91 HOMR S HEAR S Tire size designed for your vehicle THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF RENE E Mie SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG om Cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and TIRE FRONT SPARE spare tires ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE f P395 70R 4 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 COLD TIR aia gag i ji SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire And Loading Information Placard 444 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the
450. to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver s seat position is between 0 9 in and 2 7 in 22 7 mm and 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition in the ACC or RUN position 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver s seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Hood Release Lever IG OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety Two latches must be released to open the hood catch to the left The safety catch is located under the ter front ed f the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side Md c EL of the instrument panel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 CAUTION LIGHTS Headlight Switch To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open 8 in 20 cm approximately and then drop it This should secure ps The headlight switch is located on
451. to function improperly If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced the mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature If you turn the headlights park lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The Headlight Time Delay is programmable us ing the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights will turn On the first time the vehicle is shifted out of PARK and remain On unless the Parking Brake is applied Upon returning to the PARK position the DRLs will turn Off DRLs will turn Off when the ignition is switched OFF NOTE If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicl
452. transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key This light only shows that the parking brake is ap Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle plied It does not show the degree of brake application e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever e When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle Continued 424 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued CAUTION Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the
453. ts Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Active Head Restraints AHR In the event of a rear impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head and the AHR The AHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact If the AHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint 030907490 Push Button NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Rear Head Restraints The center head restraint has two adjustable positions up or down When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position When there are no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility
454. tside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French 586 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that
455. ttery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NOTE Press the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further infor mation Once the vehicle has been freed press the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501 CAUTION WARNING Continued explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be tween DRIVE and REVERSE
456. ture is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month 532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level only OAT coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle e Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freez ing e If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which
457. turn to the previous menu Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Lock When this feature is selected all doors will lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlight With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your selection touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection tou
458. uce Rain Sensing performance The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C Transmission in NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position NOTE Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column 0316011366 Tilt Telescoping Control Handle To unlock the steering column pull the lever downward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel o
459. uch as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged e g scratched reflective coat ing removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped 378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather This system can be operated through either the controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect system dis play When the Uconnect system is in different modes Ra dio Player Settings More etc the driver and passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
460. uids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administra tor NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other infor mation about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http
461. uipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Air Bag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Knee Impact Bolsters Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Front and Side Impact Sensors Front Seat Belt Pretensi
462. um infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition 450 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your Tire P For High i ino Pressures For High Speed Operation tires could cause them to fail You could have a The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi maximum capacity at continuous speeds above tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high 75 mph 120 km h speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
463. upholder Switches Press the Cold symbol once to turn on the cupholder press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off Press the Hot symbol once to activate the cupholder press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301 Rear Seat Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant s el bows Rear Seat Cupholders 035139997 302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Lighted Cupholders If Equipped STORAGE On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with Glove Compartment a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passengers The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Control Refer to Lights in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle for further information The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel P i Glove Compartment Light Ring In Rear Cupholder UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303 Console Features There is an open cubby bin located forward of the shift lever Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the center console armrest Opened Glove Compartment Center Console 304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATUR
464. urn Menu OFF and sub menus DOWN Arrow Button Press and release the DOWN arrow button to V scroll downward through the main menu and Vehicle Info and Trip Info sub menus Fuel Economy Vehicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Mes sages Trip Info Vehicle Speed and Turn Menu OFF and sub menus RIGHT Arrow Button gt Press and release the RIGHT arrow button for access to main menus sub menus or to select a personal setting in the setup menu Press and hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to reset features BACK Button Press the BACK button to scroll back to a previous menu or sub menu BACK UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays The EVIC display consists of three sections 1 The top line where compass direction and outside temperature are displayed 2 The main display area where the menus and pop up messages are displayed 3 The reconfigurable telltales section The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Message When the appropriate conditions occur this type of mes sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss
465. use battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 0213004940 This device may not cause harmful interference Separating The RKE Transmitter Case 3 Remove the battery by turning the back cover over battery facing downward and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar then replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery by the party responsible for compliance could void the clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the user s authority to operate the equipment This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyles
466. use tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tire Spinning Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not Bee d ib determining when your tires should be spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping 456 STARTING AND OPERATING 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refe
467. ut and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints shoul
468. utton Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAIN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not acti vate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN positi
469. utward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the lever upward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column Power Tilt Telescoping Switch To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering co
470. ve the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be Door Lock Knob warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door or the shift lever the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door Continued 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Continued Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry system For further information refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 If you press the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position and any front door is open the pow
471. vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys tem is on The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion System EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Ad 032036861 justable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse Adjustable Pedals Switch NOTE Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle e Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full pedal travel Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the best possible seat pedal position 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path WARNING Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicl
472. vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for mainte nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed Maintenance Schedule there are other compo
473. ver drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued 420 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Continued e Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil trans mission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami nated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you wil
474. vex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Outside Mirrors Approach Light If Equipped Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with approach lighting contain one LED which is located in the upper outboard mirror glass corner The approach light supplies illuminated entry lighting which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open any door This LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles It also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of th
475. when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h It will provide an alert audible and or visual to indicate the proximity to other objects The system can be enabled with Sound Only or Sound and Display To change the ParkSense status touch and release the Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to ParkSense in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and operating information e Front ParkSense amp Chime Volume If Equipped The ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected from the EVIC or Uconnect System if equipped The chime volume settings include LOW MEDIUM and HIGH The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM To make your selection touch the ParkSense Chime Volume soft key until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Touch the arrow back soft key to return to the previous menu ParkSense will retain its last known configura tion state through ignition cycles o Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped Touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the outside rearview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmissio
476. will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The I
477. with do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops Proper lug nut bolt torque is very important to ensure mm back into the normal range If the pointer remains on that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle Any the H turn the engine off immediately and call for time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the service vehicle the lug nuts bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench 484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Torque Specifications Lug Nut Bolt Torque Lug Nut Lug Nut Bolt Size Bolt Socket Size 130 Ft Lbs 176 N m M14 x 1 50 22mm Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles 0605005441 Wheel Mounting Surface Tighten the lug nuts bolts in a star pattern until each nut bolt has been tightened twice After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts bolts are properly seated against the wheel 0605006372 Torque Patterns WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle
478. y DTE 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Miles Per Gallon MPG Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Average Fuel Economy ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset There is an ECO icon between the Compass and Outside Temperature info at the top of the EVIC display This icon will appear whenever the Multi Displacement System MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of
479. y Severe transmission dam age may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals In addition change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or if the trans mission is disassembled for any reason Rear Axle For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Change Axle Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during oth
480. y Mode When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status touch and release the Day Night or Auto soft key Then touch the back arrow soft key 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss e Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the back arrow soft key Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the back arrow soft key e Set Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the Set Language soft key and then touch the desired language soft key until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Units When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or
481. y after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Start Keyless Enter N Go Key Fob is in the passenger compartment Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button 1 The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL 2 Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START STOP button once ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 3 The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds 4 If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever shift selector in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever shift selector is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short presses in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the
482. y the last set speed NOTE You can resume ACC from a minimum of 20 mph 32 km h WARNING The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing the RES button The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U S mph or Metric km h units U S Speed mph e RES button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Metric Speed kmlh e RES button once will result in a 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 2 km h e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display To Decrease Speed While ACC is set
483. you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Modes Of Operation Modes Of Operation With EVIC Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Modes Of Operation With Uconnect System If Equipped Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Program mable Features Uconnect Access Settings in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion Blind Spot Alert Lights Only When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn signal is t
484. you press the button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command amp VR Button is t VR only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect amp Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or another prompt For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mo bile For each feature explanation in t
485. your vehicle Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations Continued It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may 434 STARTING AND OPERATING ME occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver When the throttle is released very quickly Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes Rain Brake Support Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode it does not function in the intermittent mode When Rain Brake Support is active there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If t

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

MB840 USER`S MANUAL  PostBase-Navigator  Canada    （平成23年12月8日付け環水大大第111208001号） [PDF  RHODE ISLAND PREVENTION - KIT Solutions Support Site  Belkin Bulldog Plus  Patriot Memory PCCUSB2P-BK mobile device charger  Mode d`emploi : mon enfant passe au CP  Información de seguridad general  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file